JP2022072489A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a Pachinko game machine provided with a variable winning device enabling a player to hope for entry of many game balls even with a small variable winning port and with the case that displacing operation that eases ball entry is performed for a short time.SOLUTION: A variable winning device (a big winning device P750) is configured to allow game balls to enter a variable member (a big winning port slide plate P7533) for varying easiness of entry from a plurality of flow channels different in flow-down direction of game balls, to drop game balls on a variable member vertically and to enter as variable operation of the variable member is performed, and to flow and drop game balls flowing in another flow channel of the variable member to a winning area occurring by moving them from the horizontal direction on the basis that the variable member of a variable entry port is displaced, so that entry from nearly two directions is possible. The variable winning device is small but has a large winning area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 54

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In recent pachinko gaming machines, a special symbol lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting prize opening on the game board surface (game area), and when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. Is a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a big hit game state (special game state) and can win a large number of prize balls by opening the big prize opening provided on the game board surface. Further, in the conventional technique, a pachinko gaming machine provided with a large winning opening unit (variable winning opening) having a plurality of areas that can be opened as a large winning opening and can be won has been known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-2357

However, since the conventional large winning opening unit (variable winning opening) has a structure in which a plurality of winning areas that can be won are arranged side by side in the flow direction of the gaming machine with a predetermined space, the large winning opening unit (variable winning opening) is provided. There is a problem that the size of the mouth) becomes large and the placement area of other devices and the like is restricted.

In order to solve the above problems, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine provided with a variable winning device having one opening / closing member, and the variable winning device satisfies a predetermined opening condition. The opening / closing member of 1 is configured to be displaced so that the gaming ball can easily win a prize in the variable winning device, and the opening / closing member of 1 is a region in which the gaming ball on the opening / closing member can roll. Along with the displacement operation to the mode in which the winning is easy, the game ball on the opening / closing member 1 is arranged in the vicinity of the opening / closing member and the first winning area where the gaming ball falls toward the winning area of the variable winning device. A second winning area in which the gaming ball is dropped into the winning area after the gaming ball is rolled toward the winning area generated by the displacement operation of the opening / closing member in the winning region. It is configured to have a possible area.

It should be noted that any combination of the components according to the above invention, and the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media containing computer programs, data structures, and the like. However, the configurations according to the embodiments and modifications described in the embodiments for carrying out the invention are also effective as aspects of the present invention.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present invention, it is provided with a small variable winning opening and a variable winning device that can be expected to win a large number of gaming balls even when a displacement motion that facilitates entry is performed for a short time. A pachinko machine can be provided.

It is a front view of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the front direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view in the rear direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view which shows the game board attached to the presupposed pachinko machine. It is a functional block diagram of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the transition of the gaming state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the power-on process. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning or failing lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning symbol lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in the low base state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in the high base state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the special variation pattern lottery table which is referred to for a limited period of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the staging control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the staging control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure showing the game effect of the symbol variation display (during the stop display of the decorative symbol) during the normal game (low probability / low base medium) of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the game production of the situation where the reach production with high expectation that becomes a big hit of the premise pachinko game machine is performed. It is a figure which showed the game production of the state which the big hit game is executed in the presupposed pachinko game machine. It is a figure which showed the game effect during operation of the electric chew support function which is in the specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base) of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the duplication of each time saving of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the number of time reductions in each time reduction of a presupposed pachinko gaming machine, and the reference variation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table which is referred to in each time saving of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the game flow of the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the normal game (low probability / low base medium) of the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Example, and the time saving. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 of an effect (1) suggesting a time-saving operation of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment during normal gaming (low probability / low base). FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 of an effect (1) suggesting a time-saving operation of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment during normal gaming (low probability / low base). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 of an effect (1) suggesting a time-saving operation of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment during normal gaming (low probability / low base). FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 of an effect (2) suggesting a time-saving operation of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment during normal gaming (low probability / low base). FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 of an effect (2) suggesting a time-saving operation of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment during normal gaming (low probability / low base). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 of an effect (2) suggesting a time-saving operation of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment during normal gaming (low probability / low base). FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 of an effect (3) suggesting a time-saving operation of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment during normal gaming (low probability / low base). FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 of an effect (3) suggesting a time-saving operation of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment during normal gaming (low probability / low base). FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the order in which the decorative symbols are stopped from changing during normal gaming (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows from the fluctuation display to the fluctuation stop of a decorative symbol during a normal game (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production flow of the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. 11 is an explanatory diagram 11 showing a reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game flow of the pachinko game machine of 2nd Example. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the time saving of the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Example, and the gaming state. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the 3rd embodiment. It is a front view which shows the game board of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view and the rear view of the big prize apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the big prize apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the flow path structure of the big prize apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the flow path cross section of the big prize apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the flow path cross section of the big prize apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows another example of the big prize apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 1 (game flow 1) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 1 (the hit type 1) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 2 (game flow 2) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 2 (hit type 2) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 3 (game flow 3) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 3 (hit type 3) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 4 (game flow 4) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 4 (hit type 4) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the game machine specification 5 (game flow 5) of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 5 (the hit type 5) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the game machine specification 6 (game flow 6) of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 6 (the hit type 6) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the game machine specification 7 (game flow 7) of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine specification 7 (the hit type 7) of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows the effect screen 1 of the launch instruction effect of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect screen 2 of the launch instruction effect of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect screen 3 of the launch instruction effect of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other production screen of the launch instruction effect of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “prerequisite technique”) which is the premise of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As typical examples of pachinko gaming machines related to the prerequisite technology, the pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, and the gaming board provided in this pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIG. 4. First, refer to these figures. The machine configuration of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be referred to as front-back direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction, respectively.

[Machine configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine P is configured in an outer rectangular shape, and is configured in a square shape on the front surface of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the gaming facility in a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1. The front frames P2 are attached to each other so that they can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20) arranged on the front left edge portions of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is assembled and held on the front surface side of the front frame P2 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 is visible to the player through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. Has been done. Further, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are rotated in either the left-right direction by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko gaming machine P, depending on the rotation direction. , The outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, or the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. Then, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

At the lower part of the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball plates P340 (upper ball plate P341 and lower ball plate P342) for storing game balls are provided. Further, the glass frame P3 is provided with an effect lamp P350 that emits light according to the development status of the game, and a speaker P370 capable of outputting sounds such as sound effects according to the development status of the game. A staging operation means P380 for performing a predetermined staging operation is attached to the lower center of the glass frame P3, and the staging operation means P380 possessed by this pachinko gaming machine, which is shown as a prerequisite technique, is a push input type button P381 and a tilting operation. It is equipped with a type lever P382, and the button P381 enables the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided in the glass frame, and the operating means itself. Allows operation input when is displaced upward (input permission state) (multiple operations are possible with the staging operation means of 1).

At the lower right of the front frame P2, a handle P204 for operating the firing of the game ball and adjusting the firing intensity is provided. A launching device unit P240 is further provided in the lower part of the front frame P2, and although not shown, a ball feeding mechanism P241 that sends out game balls stored in the upper ball dish P341 one by one, is sent out from this ball feeding mechanism. A launching device P242 having a launching mechanism (a hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) that launches a game ball toward the game area P501, a launching control board P243 that synchronously controls the operation of the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the launching device P242, etc. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured based on a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a transparent synthetic resin or wood. Note that FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine P including the gaming board P5 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the gaming board unit P5. FIG. 4 illustrates a state in which the staging bonus P560 (also referred to as “movable staging device”, “staging movable body”, “staging movable bonus”, etc.) provided in the game board unit is operating. On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left to the upper right part, and a circle arranged from the vicinity of the center of the lower part of the game board to the inner side of the outer rail P502 from the lower left to the upper left part. It is provided with an arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 arranged between the end of the outer rail P502 in the upper right portion and the lower part of the board surface and formed in a curved shape that opens to the left, and the outer rail P502. A substantially circular game area P501 is formed inside the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 has a left side area P501L (left-handed area), which is a left side area of the center accessory P540, and a right side area of the center accessory, with reference to the center accessory P540 arranged substantially in the center. It has a right side region P501R (right-handed region). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and wind turbines P511 (not shown), a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball-entry devices (referred to as "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a normal-figure operating port P741 (general-figure operating gate device) and a large winning opening P751 (attacker) are arranged. It should be noted that the number of large winning openings may be one, or may be configured to have a plurality of large winning openings. Further, in the present specification, due to the configuration of the ball entry device, a game ball is ejected after entering the ball entry device, and a game ball further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball entry device (gate type). On the other hand, the fact that the game ball is detected by the internal detection switch is called "entry" or "winning (especially the one in which the prize ball is generated)", and it flows down to the downstream game area like a gate type entrance. In particular, there is a case where the description is made separately from "passing". Further, the ball entry device may be referred to as a ball entry slot, and the winning device may be referred to as a winning slot.

Further, in the lower right of the game area P501, there is a main control display device P50 whose lighting is controlled by a main control board described later, such as a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52, and a normal symbol display device P53. Are arranged intensively. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is visibly provided through the opening of the center accessory P540. At the upper part of the center accessory P540 or the like, an effect accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs an effect operation according to the development status of the game is provided. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 through which a game ball that has flowed down without entering the winning opening of various ball entry devices can pass is provided. The game ball that has entered the winning opening of various winning devices or the game ball that has flowed into the out opening P790 flows down to the rear surface side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed by penetrating the game board P5 back and forth. Then, it is collected in the collection flow path (gamed ball passage) at the lower part of the front frame P2 and passes through the out ball sensor P792 (launched ball number sensor) provided at the lower part of the front frame for detecting the total number of fired game balls. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine.

The first start winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. The first start winning device P710 is provided with a first starting winning opening P711 in which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 is an opportunity to acquire a random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711. The lottery for the first special symbol is executed immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has elapsed.

The second start winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. The second start winning device P720 is in a state where it is easy to enter the second start winning opening P721 where a game ball can enter and the second starting winning opening P721 when a normal symbol lottery to be described later is won. An ordinary electric accessory P770, which is a movable body to be switched, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721 is a trigger for a random number used in the lottery related to the second special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721. The lottery for the second special symbol is executed immediately after the ball enters or after the holding period has elapsed. The second start winning device P721 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening P721 or is easily entered by the action of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening P721. It changes to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. That is, the second start winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening unless it is displaced to the open state, and the predetermined opportunity described later (the opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. It should be noted that the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is known to have various aspects, and the structure may not change the ease of entering the ball by opening the movable body P771, so that it is in an "open state" and a "closed state". "Is described as" easy entry state (easy entry mode) "and" difficult entry state (difficult entry mode) ", respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left side general winning device P730L arranged in the left-handed area P501L and a right-side general winning device P730R arranged in the right-handed area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P in the present premise technique, the left general winning device P730L is configured with three general winning openings P731La to P731Lc as one unit, while the right general winning device P730R is a large winning device P750 described later. It is configured as part. The entry of a game ball into the general prize opening P731 is an opportunity for the prize ball to be paid out, as with other prize devices. The number and position of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko gaming machine, which are assumed to be, are merely examples, and may be configured so as to be arranged only in the right-handed region P501R.

The normal map operating gate device P740 (normal map operating port) is provided as a starting ball entry port corresponding to a normal symbol game. The normal-figure actuating gate device P740 is provided with an actuating gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to flow further downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of the game ball to the actuating gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the second start winning device P720 is opened, that is, whether or not the normal electric accessory P770 is operated. .. As a modification, it is also possible to configure the general winning opening P731 to have a function that triggers a normal symbol lottery. In this case, in addition to the function of executing the normal symbol lottery, a prize ball It is also possible to provide a function to generate 1 as a winning device (normal figure operation winning opening).

The large prize device P750 is configured to have a large prize opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small hit. It may be called an "attacker (device)" or the like. The large winning device P750 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the large winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, in the state where the special electric accessory is activated P755), and the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening P751. Alternatively, it changes to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball (for example, a state in which the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the big hit game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by an opening / closing operation of the big winning opening P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is operated, the movable body P756 constituting the large winning opening P751 becomes a closed mode in which it is difficult to enter the ball due to a series of operation patterns (also referred to as "open pattern"). Has.

Further, depending on the specifications (specs) of the gaming machine, the large winning device P750 is called a specific area P760 (called "V zone" or "V area") through which the gaming ball can pass, and depending on the function, the "probability fluctuation function is activated". Areas ”,“ continuation areas ”, etc.) may be provided. The functions related to this "specific area" are (a) to activate the probability fluctuation function (described later) after the big hit game triggered by the passage to the specific area during the big hit game, and (b) to pass through the specific area during the small hit game. Activating the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and granting the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) Specified in a specific round during the jackpot game Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not the region has been passed. An opening / closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided in the "specific region", and the flow path can be distributed by the action of the opening / closing member P761. It may be configured to pass through a specific area P760 or a non-specific area other than the specific area P760. Further, during the big hit game or the small hit game, the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 may have a valid period and an invalid period.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the big prize device P750 is provided in the right side region P501R (right-handed region) in the gaming region P501. Therefore, in the big hit game or the small hit game, when launching the game ball toward the game area P501, it is easy to enter the big winning opening P751 by hitting the right side area P501R, so-called right-handed hit. It has become.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, will be described. On the back side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-rear communication window for attaching the game board unit P5 is attached to the center. A storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the game facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member are paid to the back set unit P4. A back passage member P403 for flowing the game ball paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 and the prize ball payout unit P410 to the upper ball plate P341 or the lower ball plate P342 is provided. Further, on the game ball flow path from the storage tank P401 to the ball dish P340, a ball pulling mechanism (ball pulling operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path for removing the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever). P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there is a main control board P40 that comprehensively controls the game progress of the pachinko gaming machine P, and an effect control board that controls the overall effect according to the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40. P41, an image control board P42 that controls image display according to game development, and the like are attached. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present premise technique, the staging control board P41 and the image control board P42 constitute a staging display unit in an assembled state integrated with the staging display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there is a payout control board P43 that controls the payout of game balls, and a power supply that receives power from the game facility side and supplies power to various control boards and electric / electronic components. A board P44 (not shown) or the like is attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are placed in a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board P5 or the back surface of the back set unit P4 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin substrate case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure. It is arranged in each. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine P can proceed with the game and execute the production. ..

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows a functional block of a pachinko gaming machine as a premise.

The pachinko gaming machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates a power source to be used in the game machine based on an AC power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. ), The payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls and the launch of game balls, and the staging control board P41 for controlling staging operations and processing. It is composed of various forms. The arrows shown in the figure indicate the upper transmission / reception relationship by a solid line arrow and the electrical connection relationship by a broken line arrow for each function.

By operating the power switch P47 provided on the board, the power supply board P44 can be used for the main control board P40, the staging control board P41, the payout control board P43, which will be described later, and various gaming devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, the electric power required for operation is generated and supplied. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the setting of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an open / close cover to prevent unauthorized operation. It is protected in a state of being.

The main control board P40 includes a first starting winning opening P711 (special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P722), a large winning opening P751 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P752), and a large winning opening P751 (large winning opening switch P752). Detection switch related to various game progress such as normal drawing operation port P741 (normal figure operation port switch P742), general winning opening P731 (left side general winning opening, right side general winning opening), out opening P790, which are other detection switches. It is connected to switches and sensors used for managing various games and monitoring fraud, such as a setting key switch P49, a vibration detection sensor P72, and a magnet sensor P73. The main control board receives information related to the occurrence of various game states from these switches, determines the control content related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids and the like, and is large in the case of a big hit or a small hit. The special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751 and the ordinary electric accessory P770 driven to make it easy to enter the ball when the ordinary symbol lottery is won. Information related to the driving mode is output to the gaming device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors and the like connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board to notify the main control board P40 of the occurrence of various gaming states based on sensor detection as information, and special electric power is used. The accessory driving means P70, the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71, and other launching permission signals for the launching device P242 are received from terminals called output ports to control each device and device.

Further, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 for displaying variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a round indicator lamp P54 for notifying the type (number of rounds) of a big hit or a small hit, and a gaming state. Main control display device P50 that displays various displays such as the status indicator light P55 that notifies And so on. Regarding the "base value", there are various other accounting methods such as data that excludes winnings such as the starting winning opening P711, etc., but if necessary in the present invention, a separate explanation will be given and it is assumed. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to a device outside the gaming machine by means of an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, or the like, and various control signals are transmitted and received to and from each of them. Further, the main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the staging control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the game machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of the prize balls by the payout device P410 and the handle P204 by the player based on the prize ball payout transmitted from the main control board P40 and the signal indicating the control state of the main control board. In response to the operation of, the launching device unit P240 controls the launching of the game ball. As an example, the payout device P410 has a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. The launching device (launching device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball plate P340 (upper ball plate P341) one by one to a position where they can be launched by the ball feed unit P241, and then turns the hammer into a game ball. It is configured to fire a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48 mainly used for initializing the gaming machine and canceling an error generated during the game, and is used for connecting the payout control board P43 and the main control board P40. The operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness or connector used.

The staging control board P41 includes a staging display device P80, a drive source and a position detection sensor (for example, a drive motor, an initial position detection sensor, and a staging position detection sensor) of the staging movable accessory P560, and a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker). 141), effect input device unit P380 (for example, effect button P381 which is effect operation means P81, effect lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), effect lamp P82 ("decorative lamp", "board lamp (P550)", "frame lamp (P350)". ) ”) And are electrically connected to each other to send and receive various control signals. Further, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine that is premised on this, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the staging control board P41, but a voice control board equipped with an IC for voice control or the like is separately provided to provide the speaker P83. It may be configured to control.

Data transmission / reception between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed by transmitting / receiving data in one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , You cannot request data transmission. Therefore, the staging control board P41 cannot refer to the information generated by the main control board P40 unless the information is transmitted. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the present invention, data is transmitted / received in both directions between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case between the main control board P40 and the staging control board P41, the data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progress]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko gaming machine P as the prerequisite technique configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly classified into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which it is easier to acquire a game ball as compared with the normal game state. The "normal gaming state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to shift to the "special gaming state", and even in the normal gaming state, there are gaming states in which the degree of advantage for the player regarding the acquisition of the right to shift to the special gaming state is different. A plurality of normal game states are provided, and among a plurality of normal game states, it is more advantageous for the player than a state in which the player can easily acquire the right to shift to the special game state (normal game state (low probability / low base state)). State) is expressed as "specific game state". The "special game state" corresponds to the so-called "big hit game" and "small hit game", and the special electric accessory driving means P70 is driven by the main control board P40, and the big winning opening P751 is opened to acquire the game ball. Means a state in which is easy.

[Normal game state: low probability / low base state]
First, a game method and a game progress in a normal game state will be described. The normal gaming state described here is a description of the "normal gaming state (low probability / low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific gaming state, and is generally in a situation where the player starts the game. The game state will be described, and the game method in the specific game state, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" will be described later.

As a method of gaming in a normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player first operates the handle P204 to launch a gaming ball toward the gaming area P501 provided on the gaming board P5. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player fires the operation amount of the handle P204 toward the left side region P501L (left-handed region) of the gaming area. Operate as if to play a game.

When the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L of the game area by the player, the launched game ball flows down the game area P501, and the game nail P510 (also referred to as “obstacle nail” or “navel”) (also referred to as “obstacle nail” or “navel”) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, to the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device, which is arranged at a position substantially below the center in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel". Either enter the ball (winning) or enter the out opening P790 as a gamed game ball without entering any winning opening. When a ball is entered into the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731, the main control board P40 causes the payout control board P43 to make the prize balls of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening (control command). ) Is output, and the player acquires a new game ball by paying out the prize ball.

Here, a special figure 1 start port switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711, and as a game state (game result) that can occur when a player launches a game ball into the left side area P501L in the game area. , When the ball is entered into the first start winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, the main control board P40 pays out the game balls of a predetermined number of prize balls and draws a lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. Get the random value to do. The random number value is acquired by acquiring the random number value generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit based on the detection of the game ball (hard latch), or by the control device of the main control board P40 by processing on the software. Techniques such as executing the process of acquiring the random number value from the previous random number generation circuit when confirming the detection information of the game ball, or acquiring the random number value updated by software (soft latch) Yes, it may be used properly according to the random number value to be acquired, or it may be used in combination. In addition, when the ball is entered into the general prize opening, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

The lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery". The "win / fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the acquired random value is "big hit" or "missing" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result includes "small hit". ). The "winning symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning / failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) in the main control display device P50. Yes, it is possible to determine one symbol from a plurality of stop display symbols for one lottery result (big hit, small hit), and "big hit" or "small hit" according to the stop display symbol determined here. It is possible to make different execution modes of the special game in. The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining at what timing the stop display symbol indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52), and the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52). It determines the time (referred to as "variable display time" or "variable pattern") in which a variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is made. It is common to use different random numbers for the "win / fail lottery", "winning symbol lottery", and "variable pattern lottery", respectively, and "win / fail lottery random numbers", "symbol random numbers", and "variable patterns". It is called a "random number". The lottery related to the control of the second special symbol performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special figure 2 start port switch P722 is also the same “special symbol lottery”. Further, a description of the "special symbol lottery" will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the game method in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the player fires a game ball in the left area P501L of the game area. Then, a game ball is inserted into the first start winning opening P711, a lottery related to the first special symbol (special symbol lottery) is executed, and a special symbol indicating "big hit" ("small hit") is shown on the special symbol display device. By displaying the stop display symbol of, the game aiming at the acquisition of the right to execute the special game is performed.

It should be noted that, in the process of receiving the special symbol lottery, the player is described above in that the special symbol is variablely displayed according to the time determined by the variable pattern lottery. If a new start winning opening (1st starting winning opening P711, 2nd starting winning opening P721) receives a ball during this special symbol variation display period, a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is executed. It has a hold function that temporarily stores the random value corresponding to the right. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is possible to hold up to four special symbol lottery as a hold function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the prize of the first start winning opening P711. The hold function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of this prerequisite technology, in addition to the hold of the first special symbol, the hold function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is also held up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random value used for the special symbol lottery.

As described above, in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player fires a gaming ball into the left region P501L of the gaming region to execute a special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the special symbol display device displays that the lottery result of the special gaming state such as "big hit" or "small hit" has been won and the right to shift to the special gaming state has been acquired. , The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P shifts to the special gaming state.

[Special game status]
Subsequently, the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state will be described. There are "big hit (game)" and "small hit (game)" in the special gaming state, and the special electric accessory P755 operates in both cases, that is, the special electric accessory driving means P70 is operated from the main control board P40. A drive signal is output to the player, and the large winning opening P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The difference is that the "big hit" continuously operates the special electric accessory P755 multiple times. The major difference is that the "small hit" is terminated by the operation of one special electric accessory, while it is based on the operation of the actuating device. As another difference, in the operation of the special electric accessory (big hit) based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it is possible to make the operation mode of the special electric accessory P755 more advantageous to the player. Specifically, the total opening time of the large winning opening P751 in the operating state (big hit) of the accessory continuous operating device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening of the large winning opening P751 in the small hit. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, a big hit will be described as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the prerequisite technology, is called "special game start demo" (in the case of a big hit, "big hit start demo", "role continuous operation start demo", etc., in chronological order, and is small. In the case of a hit, there is a production period called "small hit start demo") to notify the player that various special games have been acquired, and one time called "round (game)" (also called "unit game"). The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the "special game end demo" (called "big hit end demo" in the case of a big hit, "combination operation end demo", etc., and "small hit end demo" in the case of a small hit ), Which mainly consists of a game result (such as the number of acquired game balls) during a special game and a period for notifying the type of the normal game state (including the specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the method of the game during each of the above-mentioned special games will be described. First, during the "special game start demo" period, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the prerequisite technology, the large winning opening P751 is arranged in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and is in the normal game state (low probability / low). Even if the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L similar to the base state), the large winning opening P751 can hardly be expected to enter, so before the round game in which the large winning opening P751 becomes easy to enter in the special game starts. In addition, the display device P80, the speaker (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and the effect lamp produce a right-handed notification effect that urges the player to launch the game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. It is executed using P82. The player adjusts the operation amount of the handle P204 to increase the firing intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the firing position so that the game ball flows down to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. (Perform right-handed).

During the "round (game)" period, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite technique, the large winning opening P751 is in an easy-to-enter state due to a drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric accessory driving means P70. A production that congratulates the player on having a big hit (small hit) according to the execution period of the special game, or a normal game state that shifts after the special game is completed is more advantageous for the player. Perform an effect such as an effect that suggests whether the game will be in a gaming state. The player launches the game ball into the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the large winning opening P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big winning opening determined based on the type of big hit (small hit) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, the game ends when a predetermined "specified number" (sometimes expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enters. Then, according to the type of special game state (type of big hit, small hit) being executed, when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite technique, has the number of game balls acquired during the period of this special game state and multiple times continuously performed during the specific game period described later. A normal game that informs the total number of acquired game balls acquired in the special game state (acquired without shifting to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)) or shifts after the special game state. Notification of the type of state and notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-mentioned right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the handle in preparation for the game according to the type of the normal game state of the transition destination from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are premised, when a big hit game as a special gaming state is executed, with some exceptions, a special gaming state for a player called a "specific gaming state" as a normal gaming state. It is a game that allows you to enjoy the so-called "renso", in which the right to shift to is easily acquired, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated.

[Specific game state]
Subsequently, the "specific game state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the specific gaming states are roughly divided into three specific gaming states. Then, there are a "probability state" and a "base state" as elements that separate these types, and a specific game state is configured by a combination thereof.

(Probability state)
The "probability state" is a probability fluctuation function based on the operating state of the "probability fluctuation function" (also referred to as "probability change"), which is a function of changing the probability that the lottery result becomes a "big hit" in the winning / failing lottery in the special symbol lottery. When the winning / failing lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "big hit" with a higher probability than when is activated and not activated, it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability change state", "probability fluctuation state"). There is also), and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit for one special symbol lottery is high.

(Base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the "ratio (expected value) of the game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", and is generally an ordinary electric accessory. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also referred to as "electric chew support (electric support) state"). .. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended firing position of the gaming ball is switched, so that "a prize ball is obtained when a predetermined number of gaming balls are launched." If the "ratio of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" is special while suppressing the consumption of game balls by increasing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (easily paid out) in the period until the special game state is acquired. It is a gaming state that is advantageous for the player in that it is possible to aim at acquiring the gaming state.

The "electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), but mainly includes a combination of three functions (at least one). ). The three functions that make up the "electric chew support function" are "ordinary symbol probability change", "ordinary symbol time reduction", and "opening extension (of ordinary electric accessory)". "Ordinary symbol probability change" refers to a state in which there is a high probability that an ordinary electric accessory will be activated in the "ordinary symbol lottery". The "ordinary symbol time reduction" refers to a state in which the time from executing the ordinary symbol lottery to displaying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is shortened in the ordinary symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. "Extension of opening of ordinary electric accessory" means that the game ball can easily enter the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory P770 for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery. It refers to changing to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time for making an ordinary electric accessory in an easy-to-enter state.

In the "ordinary symbol lottery", the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas in the ordinary symbol lottery, the target is a lottery related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the lottery. It differs in that the execution trigger is the entry of a game ball into the normal drawing actuating gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the hit / fail, the symbol, and the variation pattern are determined by lottery and the holding function is provided. "Public map" (or "Public map" (or "Public map variable pattern lottery"" such as "Public symbol lottery", "Public symbol lottery", "Public symbol lottery", etc. It is expressed by adding "ordinary pattern") to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been described as elements for distinguishing the types of "specific game state", but "time saving state" ("variable time shortening state"" is another element that constitutes the specific game state. , The "variable time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the fluctuation display time (variation pattern) per special symbol is shortened and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery per unit time is increased, which is more for the player. It is in an advantageous state in that many special symbol lottery can be received per unit time. The "time saving state" (variable time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and it is rare that a specific gaming state is configured by itself.

[Specific game state 1: Low probability / High base state]
Returning to the explanation relating to the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in FIGS. 6 (1), (8), and (12). The game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse a predetermined number of games (* (8). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there may be a case where the specific game state 1 shifts to the specific game state 1 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (2), (7), and (11) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (2), (7), and (11) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 1. (d). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (2) only). The "number of games" refers to, for example, the "number of times the special symbol lottery is executed". In addition, the "number of games" may be paraphrased as the "number of fluctuations" or the "number of operations". Hereinafter, "game" and "variation", "number of games", "number of fluctuations" and "number of operations" are used as synonymous terms.

After shifting to the specific gaming state 1 (low probability / high base state), both the above-mentioned "electric chew support function" and "variation time shortening function" are activated in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the gaming board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the normal electric gate device P740 and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory are placed in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. The mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery by performing "right-handed" to launch the game ball into the right-hand region P501R (right-handed region) of the gaming area. Further, the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is controlled to the above-mentioned "time saving state" in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability / high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is reached, the player launches a game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the general drawing The first procedure is to enter (pass) the ball into the actuated gate device P740, and by entering (passing) the ball into the actuated gate device P740, the main control board P40 receives a normal symbol lottery. Since the normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is won with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal figure probability change function, the game ball is sent to the normal figure operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 occurs once. When the ordinary electric accessory P770 is activated, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is premised on, has the second start winning opening P721, which triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol, in an easy-to-enter state, and the player continues to play the second. As a procedure, a game ball is launched toward the second starting winning opening P721. When a game ball enters the second start winning opening P721, detection information is input to the main control board P40, a special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the right to execute the special game (big hit, small hit). The lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In the case of acquisition of a small hit game, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, acquisition of a small hit game (or acquisition of multiple small hit games, a specific type) It may be designed to end by (acquisition of a small hit game). When the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the process shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 2: High probability / High base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in (3), (7), and (9) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there may be a case where the specific game state 2 shifts to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (4), (8), and (10) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (4), (8), and (10) include (a) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 2. (c). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed.

After shifting to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). The difference is that it is a "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of the game in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big hit earlier than the high probability of winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery. do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 2 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), and the specific game state Move to 3 (high probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 3: High probability / low base state]
Subsequently, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in FIGS. 6 (5), (10), and (11). The game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse a predetermined number of games (* (10). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there may be a case where the specific game state 3 shifts to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (6), (9), and (12) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (6), (9), and (12) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 3. (d). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (6) only).

When shifting to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated and the "high probability (state)" is set, and the specific game state 1 and the specific game Unlike the state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "variation time shortening function" are not operating. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the gaming board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the normal electric gate device P740 and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory are placed in the right side area P501 (right-handed area) of the game area. Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that the player makes a "right-handed" shot of a game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). However, the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player will proceed with the game by "left-handed" in which the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since it is in a high probability state, there is a probability that it will be a big hit in the special symbol lottery. Except for the fact that the jackpot game can be acquired at an early stage because it is high, the game method and game progress are the same as in the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

The specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 3 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) ends depending on the number of games, the process shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

Note that the specific gaming state 3 (high probability / low base state) is different from the board layout configuration of FIG. 6 described as the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, and the normal electric accessory P770 is located in the right side region P501R (right-handed region). Arrangement of winning devices on the game board, such as arranging a third start winning opening of a type that does not have, and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol lottery can be received in a short time. In addition, depending on the control of the time saving state, "right-handed" may be the recommended gaming state.

As described above, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the game progresses according to a plurality of gaming states, but it is not always necessary to provide all the above-mentioned gaming states. Therefore, among the game machine specifications composed of a combination of a plurality of gaming states, the game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted by the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P are illustrated below.

Regarding typical gaming machine specifications ("specs"), as an example of the types of gaming machine specifications related to the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery, "(until next time) probability change", "ST (number of times cut probability change)" , "V probability change (also called" ball probability "," attack round system ")", "latent probability change" can be adopted. The difference in the specifications of the gaming machine due to the difference in the probability fluctuation function may be expressed as "this gaming machine is a" XX machine (example: ST machine) "". Further, in a gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, by passing through a specific area P760 inside the large winning opening P751 during a small hit game, the accessory continuous operation device is subsequently activated (that is, the game shifts to the large hit game). There is also a game machine specification called "small hit V".

[Probability change (until next time)]
First, I will explain "probability change (until next time)". "Probability change until next time" is generally defined as "specific game state 2 (specific game state 2), which is the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states among a plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko gaming machine P. The game machine specifications for the "pachinko game machine" that will continue until the right of the next big hit game is acquired (high probability / high base state) are shown. In other words, the "probability change until next time" gaming machine is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) continues until the right to the next big hit game is acquired, and it does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. Has been done.

Depending on the type of jackpot, there may be a case where the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is controlled. Also, in the "pachinko gaming machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to the next big hit game", the probability fluctuation function continues until the next big hit. Although it is sometimes called "probability change until the next time", the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. In this way, since it is a probabilistic change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not operating, it is expressed separately as "latent probability change".

[ST (Probability change)]
Next, "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" will be described. "ST" is an abbreviation for "Special Time", and generally, "specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) performs a predetermined number of special symbol lottery (predetermined number of times). The game machine specifications for "Pachinko game machines that will continue until the right of the jackpot game is acquired" are shown.

Depending on the type of jackpot, there may be a case where the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is controlled. In addition, as in the case of the above-mentioned "probability change until the next time", the game state is set to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) until a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is performed or the right of the big hit game is acquired. It is also possible to configure the case to be controlled so as to have a state called "latent probability change (latent ST)".

In addition, even in the case of "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)", the period in which the gaming state is controlled by ST is set to "until the lottery of the special symbol lottery is performed 10,000 times". If it is a gaming machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "probability change until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until next time" and "ST (probability change by number of times)" distinguish "probability change state" as a gaming machine specification in that the end of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is different. Is. On the other hand, regarding whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is activated in the specific game state, that is, the execution start of the probability fluctuation function, as described in the "V probability change (" ball probability "" attack round system ")" described below. Gaming machine specifications (“specs”) may be expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a gaming machine specification called "V probability variation" will be described. The "V probability change" is referred to as a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the large winning opening P751 during a big hit game before the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. When the passage of a gaming ball (“V winning”) is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round), the probability fluctuation function is activated after the jackpot game. The gaming machine specifications of the pachinko gaming machine that controls the transition to the specific gaming state (specific gaming state 1 or specific gaming state 3) are shown. The "specific region" used for the "V probability variation" may be particularly referred to as a "probability fluctuation function operating region".

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification indicating that whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated depends on the gaming result during the jackpot game (depending on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific region P760). There is a "V-probability change (V-loop)" depending on whether the activated probability fluctuation function ends with the same control as the "probability change until the next time" explained earlier or with the same control as the "ST". ] And "V-ST" are different from the expressions indicating the game machine specifications.

In the pachinko gaming machine P that adopts "V probability variation" as the game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the big hit game, the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the big hit game, and the normal game state or the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability / high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability fluctuation function operates after the big hit game is switched between the case where the V prize is won and the case where the V prize is not won, and at the same time, the operation mode of the electric chew support function can be changed. As an example, in the "V probability variation (V-loop)" machine, if a V prize is won, the probability fluctuation function and the electric chew support function will continue until the next big hit, and if the V prize is not won, the probability fluctuation function will be activated. The electric chew support function is also limited to 100 special symbol lottery.

[Small hit V]
Next, a gaming machine specification (spec) called "small hit V" will be described as a gaming machine specification that can provide a gaming state advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition of a big hit without having a probability fluctuation function.

The "small hit V" is a "specific area" provided inside the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game (during the operation of the special electric accessory) executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. When passing through "P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the accessory continuous actuating device is activated following the small hit game, that is, the game machine specification for starting the big hit game. be. In other words, by passing the specific area P760 during the small hit, it is a gaming machine specification that can acquire the big hit game without obtaining the result of the big hit as a result of the special symbol lottery.

"Small hit V" is a special electric accessory that is not operating as a result of the special symbol lottery. It is a specification that operates the accessory continuous operation device when passing through the specific area P760 during operation (while the large winning opening P751 is open), and while it may be expressed as "Type 1 small hit V", the conventional pachinko game Since it has a game playability close to that of the so-called "type 2 pachinko" gaming machine, it may be expressed as "type 1 and type 2 mixer".

Generally, a pachinko gaming machine that adopts "small hit V" as a gaming machine specification does not have a probability change function (probability fluctuation function), and the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of an electric chew support function. That is, it becomes a change trigger of a special symbol (for example, winning a small hit at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a small hit at the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, which makes it easy to win when the electric chew support function is activated. By configuring it with a starting winning opening, it is easy to win a small hit under the situation where the electric chew support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big hit with a V winning during a small hit game. By doing so, instead of increasing the random value range that becomes a big hit as in the probability variation function, it is a game playability that increases the possibility of acquiring a big hit by a small hit.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical, and some other characteristic game machine specifications are known. Therefore, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
The "limiter" is a case where a specific game state in which the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is activated is repeatedly performed with the execution of the jackpot game in between (so-called "ream villa" state), and is determined in advance. When the number of repetitions (number of consecutive villas) is reached, even if the jackpot game that the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is supposed to operate is executed, the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function It is a function that limits the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "probability change limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "time saving limiter (electric sapoli limiter)". Call. A gaming machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Fall" is a gaming machine that executes a "fall lottery" that determines whether or not to terminate the probability fluctuation function each time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. Show the specifications. In the situation where the electric chew support function is operating together with the probability fluctuation function, if the fall lottery is won, the operation of the electric chew support function ends at the end of the probability fluctuation function, or only the probability fluctuation function ends. The operation of the electric chew support function may continue.

It should be noted that a plurality of the above-mentioned gaming machine specifications can be combined. For example, when "ST" and "falling" are combined, the specific gaming state 2 (high probability / high base state) is used. When either (1) the fall lottery is won, (2) the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, or (3) the right to the jackpot game is acquired, the specific game state 2 ( The high probability / high base state) will end (shift to another gaming state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 that controls the progress of the game in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise to be described in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine that adopts "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" as the above-mentioned gaming machine specifications (specs) will be described. .. In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "PsOO" indicating the processing step in the figure will be described as "stepOO" in the text.

[Power-on processing of main control board (main loop processing of main control board)]
The main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, first executes the power-on processing (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. Here, the details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

When the power-on processing is started on the main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, initial settings related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the main control board P40, are performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately set the setting necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power cutoff information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006) are subsequently executed, and the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is received in response to these processes. ) Is performed.

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value" for changing the degree of advantage of the special symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P (particularly, the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device, that is, the jackpot probability). The flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting change processing" that can change "", and the flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting confirmation processing" for confirming the "setting value" It is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to establish (whether or not to turn on) in the game stop state setting process performed later. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the detection status of the frame opening switch P131 (the switch that detects that the front frame is open to the outer frame) and the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is operated by the player. , Data including data indicating the detection status of whether the setting key switch P49 is rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006), when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko gaming machine P normally turned off the power, and the control data related to the game state when the power cut occurred was normally performed. It is a process of confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is played in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later as an error. It is a process to set (turn on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the processing results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change state", "setting confirmation state", and "unrecoverable". It is a process to set a flag to shift to one of the "error state" and the game progress disallowed state. The details of the "game stop state setting process" are shown in FIG. 8, and the description will be given based on the description in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, it is first determined whether or not the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko gaming machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1". Therefore, the processing of the following step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the input port confirmation process (step 1004) generated 1 Calculates the operation information of the setting key switch from the byte data so that it becomes off data. Although not shown, in any case of YES or NO in step 1102, the bit in the 1-byte data whose frame is open is also calculated to be off data.

In the following step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that can be determined as "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, the situation where it is judged that "there is a setting change operation" is (1) the frame release switch P131 is on (the frame is open when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is on. It requires three states: (it is being rotated) and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. As described above, the information of the frame opening switch P131 is set to off in the 1-byte data, and it is determined in this step whether or not both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, when the two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (note that the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1", and either of them is used. One data may be "0"). Then, when it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, that is, when it is determined to be YES in step 1104, the data indicating "setting is being changed" is stored as the game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated (. Step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1108. If the set value information stored in the ram (RAM = Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (when the operation is to return from the unrecoverable error state), it is set as the initial setting value. The data corresponding to the set value "1" is set in the area for storing the set value (step 1118).

Next, in step 1108, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred. The game stop error is an error that requires ram clearing and setting (changing) processing when the game cannot proceed, such as a checksum abnormality (ram abnormality) or a setting value abnormality. Refers to. The determination in step 1108 determines whether or not the game should be set as the game stop state based on the processing result of the power off information confirmation / checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored at the time of the previous power off processing. .. If it is determined that an error state should be set (if YES is determined in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (step 1110, step 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112.

In the following step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 is operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the relevant step,

(A) When the operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, among the judgments that "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is on (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) When the setting key switch P49 is on, is satisfied, and (3) The ram clear switch P48 is on, is not satisfied.

(B) When the ram clear operation for clearing the data is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, is not satisfied, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. When satisfied

(C) When the power is turned on without any operation such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "ram clear operation", etc.
It is one of the situations. The 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) in these states is (a) the bit data indicating on / off of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (on data)", and (b) the ram clear switch. The bit data indicating on / off of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (on data)", and (c) the 1-byte data is all off data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated in step 1112, and if there is a ram clear operation (when it is determined to be YES in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine goes into a game-enabled state after ram clearing. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except in the situation where the ram clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is, and at this time, when the operation to shift the game stop state flag to the "setting confirmation state" is performed (in step 1112). (When determining NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and it is stored as data indicating "setting is being confirmed" in the 1-byte data indicating the game stop status flag (when it is determined to be NO). Step 1118). Further, when there is neither a ram clear operation nor a transition operation to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is originally data indicating that there is no game stop as a game stop state flag. It is set as information without game stop.

If a value indicating some kind of stop state is stored for the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), it is the main game allowable state in the power-on process (step 1000). In the interrupt processing (step 2000), which is the main body of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (step 1028 to step 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the game progress described as "basic game progress". However, these controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process of FIG. 7, the subsequent process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is completed, it is determined whether or not the ram clear operation has been performed (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. This process is executed regardless of whether the setting key switch P49 is off or on. If it is determined in step 1010 that there is a ram clear operation, a predetermined storage area is initialized from the ram storage area of the main control board P40.

In the subsequent processes from step 1014 to step 1020, a process of setting an effect control command (effect command) for causing the effect control board P41 to recognize the state of the gaming machine is performed from the main control board P40 when the power is turned on. More specifically, in step 1014, a process of clearing the staging control command that had not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off) is performed from the storage area. Then, when the information regarding the current gaming state of the main control board P40 restored after the power is turned on in step 1016 is generated as an effect control command and it is determined in step 1018 that the gaming state is not stopped, the generated restoration is performed in step 1020. The effect control command indicating the game state is set in the area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of turning on the power is completed, the necessary data (drive signal) for returning the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 to the state before the power failure occurred. ) Is output from the output port to the special electric accessory driving means P70 and the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71. (Step 1022)
Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is subjected to the processing of setting the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the interval for executing the interrupt processing (FIG. 9, step 2000) described later is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process is completed, the player shifts to a cycle process called a main loop in which the player can play, and the execution of the cycle process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
As shown in FIG. 7, in the processing of the main loop of the main control board, first, the processing for prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing is performed in step 1026, and until the processing of the main loop is completed (interruption is permitted in step 1036). Up to) Limit the execution of interrupt processing.

When interrupts are disabled, in the following step 1028, a watchdog timer is used to monitor the occurrence of a runaway CPU of the main control board P40 (a situation in which processing loops and the process does not proceed). Clear (initialize) the area that stores the timekeeping information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether the power supply is cut off (for example, whether the power supply cutoff signal sent from the power supply board P44 when the voltage drops is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If the power is cut off, the current gaming state is stored, the power cut information and the check sum information are stored, and the processing of the main control board P40 as the CPU is stopped (step 1032). ) Is executed. If the power is not cut off, the process shifts to the next process.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random number values are updated in the interrupt process described later, and this is a process for preventing the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to the random number being updated only in the interrupt process. If there is a process that is executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating the random number value according to the process. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final process in the main loop, and performs a process for permitting interrupts. Immediately after that, it returns to the interrupt disable of step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, but when the process of step 1036 for enabling interrupt is performed, the interrupt execution cycle (4 ms has elapsed since the previous interrupt process occurred). If the CPU of the main control board P40 has an input indicating the above state), the interrupt processing described later will be executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Subsequently, the interrupt processing (also referred to as “timer interrupt processing”) performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the submodule program provided so as to be changeable according to the gaming machine specifications (specs) is generally constant. It is configured to read and control in the order of. The processing related to those submodules will be briefly described below.

(Watchdog timer clear)
At the beginning of the interrupt process, a watchdog timer clear process is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 described above. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation process)
In the input port confirmation process, by confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, information that enables identification as to whether or not there is input information as information necessary for determination in the subsequent process is obtained. It is a process to generate. (Step 2004)
The information input to the input port includes input signals related to artificial operations such as an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, and an input signal indicating the operation status (whether or not there is a touch) of the handle P204. , Special figure 1 Input signal indicating the game result by detecting the game ball such as the start port switch P712 and the big prize opening switch P752, the magnetic sensor P73, the door opening sensor P131, the vibration detection sensor P72, etc. are provided for fraud monitoring. There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all reads is called the input data (“level data”) in this interrupt. ), Stored in the ram of the main control board P40. For the part of the data read three times that is not the same data in all readings, the data confirmed in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms before) will be adopted as level data, that is, the interrupt this time. If the data cannot be read normally in, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) in the interrupt this time is confirmed, a comparison operation with the input data in the previous interrupt is performed to generate "rising data" (data that identifies the bit whose input data has changed from off to on). The data that identifies the switch that was switched to the on input by the interrupt this time is stored.

(Random number update process)
Random number update processing is performed by software among various random numbers such as winning / failing random numbers, symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers related to the special symbol lottery, and normal symbol lottery normal symbol winning / failing random numbers, normal symbol random numbers, and normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers. This is a process for updating a so-called soft random number, which is a random number value to be updated (step 2006). In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those that are updated in the update cycle on the circuit by the random number generation circuit and those that are updated in the soft cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers at the time of random number acquisition.

In the random number update process, as described above, the soft random number is updated, but as an update method,

(A) A random number that is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1) and setting the lower limit (or upper limit) when the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded.

(B) An arbitrary prime number is subtracted (or added) to a random number, and when the random number range is exceeded, the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) is added (or subtracted).

(C) Repeat incrementing (or decrementing) from the random number set as the initial value, and when the update of one cycle is completed, set the separately updated "initial value random number" as a new initial value and perform the same update. Things that repeat (also called initial value update type random numbers),
Various update methods such as can be exemplified. It should be noted that the update method is not limited to the one illustrated in this embodiment, and any method may be adopted as long as the randomness of random numbers can be maintained.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set in the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed". (Step 2008)
In the setting control process, it is determined whether or not the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated for the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is on-data, and it is not on-data, that is, the pachinko gaming machine. If the setting key is not turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated during the game stop flag is on-data, the current interrupt is used to determine whether to terminate "setting changing" and "setting checking". After referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated by the input port confirmation process described above), clearing the game stop flag when the setting key switch P49 is turned off, and making the game playable. An effect control command for returning (or starting) an effect is set on the effect control board according to whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Further, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), when the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", the role of the "setting change switch" in this interrupt timing is played during the period until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", when the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated in this interrupt, the "setting value" is set to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the set value. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine P having setting value data such that the setting is switched from 1 to 6 in order, each time there is rising data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. The process of increasing the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, is changed to 1 as the next value) is performed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch is monitored in the interrupt processing cycle by providing the processing in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 9). , A program for periodic monitoring during power-on processing (see FIG. 7), which enables the output of display data to the display device by LED output processing, which will be described later, and for which interrupt processing has not been set separately. Can be omitted. In addition, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmations, control display devices, and update setting values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, whether or not the game is stopped by reading out the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed by the CPU of the main control board when the pachinko gaming machine is turned on. It is a process to confirm whether or not. (Step 2010)
In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, the game stop flag data is not 0 and any bit is "1". If it is, it is determined that the game is stopped (a state in which the game needs to be stopped), and it is considered that the game is stopped, and a part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. (Up to the accessory control process (step 2028)) ”) is omitted.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting is being changed", "setting is being confirmed", and "unrecoverable error" is displayed. A state such as "occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for managing the time related to the progress of the game (step 2014).
As an example of the timer data update process, management of the variable display time set when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the operating time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (opening time of the big winning opening P751). ), Timer data update processing triggered by the progress of the game, timekeeping processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in the main control display device P50 such as the special symbol display devices P51 and P52. Examples thereof include a process for measuring the switching time for switching, a process for measuring the period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the like.

The timer data updated by the timer update process is divided into the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40 for each type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer", and is continuous. Each is stored in the storage area.

In the timer update process, processing such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" is performed on the storage area that stores the individual types of timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. The timer update process performs a process of decrementing (-1) the timer data stored in the storage area. If the stored timer data is already "0", it is processed so that it becomes "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it is set to "0", or it is set to "0". If it is "0", do not decrement, etc.).

In the presupposed Pachinko gaming machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so in the case of 1-byte timer data, only the management target that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information managed only within 1 second (when there is little), it is also possible to configure it with only 2-byte timer data and not to have 1-byte timer update processing. Is. Further, when it is necessary to manage the time value that cannot be managed even by the 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than the "3-byte timer".

(Validity period setting process)
The validity period setting process is a period for controlling the winning opening (mainly the winning opening related to the large winning opening P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770) that can be changed to the easy entry mode or the difficult entry mode. In addition, it is a process of setting a valid period in the valid extension period and setting an invalid period for other periods (when the winning opening is in a difficult-to-enter mode and other than the valid extension period). (Step 2016)
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine, the winning of the large winning opening P751 as the large winning device and the winning of the second starting winning opening P721 which is the second starting winning device P720 equipped with the ordinary electric accessory P770 are set as the valid period. It becomes a process to do.

In addition, during the valid extension period, in order to treat the game ball that entered at the timing immediately before the large winning opening P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770 shifts to the difficult-to-enter mode as an effective winning, the large winning opening P750 (special electric accessory) Since it is treated as an effective period even after the control period for executing the open control for the electric accessory such as P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 has elapsed, a certain period of time appropriately set according to the structure of the electric accessory is set. It is a control period.

Further, depending on the game machine specifications, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, an effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set, and in such a case, in this process. The validity period of a specific area is also set.

(Prize winning monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of the game ball for various winning openings (large winning opening P751, starting opening P711, P721, general winning opening P731) in the pachinko gaming machine, and the prize is awarded. It is a process of generating information that triggers a process of generating a special symbol lottery right (occurrence of hold) for a ball or a starting ball. (Step 2018)
The processing contents are as follows: (a) Detection of the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004) (b) The winning opening having a valid period. In that case, it is judged whether or not the prize is won during the valid period, and when a valid prize is generated for each winning slot, (c) The staging control command indicating the winning information for each winning slot to be transmitted to the effect control board P41. Settings, (d) Update the counter value (called "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among the actions based on the detection of various winning openings Updates the counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in).

In the winning monitoring process, not only the winning of various winning openings, but also the out-ball detection switch P792 provided for counting the out-balls, the operation opening switch P742 that triggers the ordinary symbol lottery, and the gaming machine. Depending on the specifications, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and the operation of the game machine (for example, the operation of the game machine other than the generation of a prize ball or the trigger of a special symbol lottery). In this process, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting information to the effect that the operation port switch P742 and the specific area P760 have passed to the effect control board P41 is performed.

(Operating port monitoring process)
The operation port monitoring process is a process related to the occurrence of hold related to the normal symbol lottery when the rising data of the normal figure operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). conduct. (Step 2020)
More specifically, when the normal symbol operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of holds does not reach the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new hold. Since it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of holds to increase the number of holds information by one, random numbers for the normal figure hit / miss random number, the normal figure symbol random number, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern random number are used. Obtained from the generation circuit, or the current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as a hold.

(Ordinary symbol control processing)
The normal symbol control process performs a process related to the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on which is the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called the normal symbol status or the normal electric accessory, and perform control according to the state. The status of the normal symbol is "0: Standing by normal symbol", "1: Normal symbol is changing", "2: Normal symbol is stopped and displayed", "3: Normal electric accessory is operating", "4: Normal". There is a "Demo of the end of the electric accessory", and processing is performed according to each state.
<< Normal symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The normal symbol change start monitoring control process is a submodule process called by the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: waiting for the normal symbol".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of pending numbers related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not occurred, and the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of holdings related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the right to change the normal symbol has been generated, and it is judged that the condition for starting the change of the normal symbol is satisfied, and the change of the normal symbol is changed. Execute the process related to the start.

When it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the hold number information is decremented by -1 from the area for storing the hold number information related to the normal symbol lottery, and then the normal symbol hit / miss random number, the normal symbol symbol random number, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number are respectively. Call and perform a normal figure winning / failing lottery, a normal figure pattern lottery, and a normal figure fluctuation pattern lottery, store the lottery result in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and store the storage area of the pending number information. The process of shifting is performed so that the processes are processed in the memorized order, and the normal symbol status is updated to "1: Normal symbol is changing". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used depending on the operating status of the above-mentioned "base state" (probability fluctuation function of normal symbol, fluctuation time shortening function of normal symbol), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , Ordinary symbols tend to have a short variation display time.
《Processing during normal symbol change》
The normal symbol changing process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "1: normal symbol changing".

In the normal symbol change processing, a timer that manages the change display of the normal symbol until the change display time of the normal symbol according to the change pattern of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol change start monitoring control process elapses (normal). This is a process of causing the normal symbol display device P53 to execute the fluctuation display of the normal symbol until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process.

More specifically, when the normal symbol variation display timer is not 0, the normal map display switching counter whose maximum value is "5" is updated every time this process is executed, and the normal symbol display switching counter is set to "5". At the timing of "5", a process of storing information about the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LED constituting the normal symbol display device P53. The normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value "0" at the timing when the maximum value "5" is reached. That is, in the variation display of the normal symbol, the lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4 ms × 5 = 20 ms). The switching interval can be set as appropriate. For example, if the maximum value of the normal figure display switching counter is 25, the display pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). Be done.

When the variation display time of the normal symbol ends, that is, when the normal symbol variation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal symbol stop display symbol determined by the normal symbol lottery is the main control display device. Data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 so that the stop display is displayed on the normal symbol display device P53 in P50. Then, the symbol fixing time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: Normal symbol stop display".
<< Processing during normal symbol stop display >>
The normal symbol stop display processing is a submodule process called by the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: Normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer for which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol change processing is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0". Then, a process of setting for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "hit", it depends on the winning symbol and the operating state of the base state (extension function of the normal electric accessory). , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the winning counter related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and set the normal symbol status to "3: Ordinary electric accessory in operation". Update to.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "missing", the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: waiting for normal symbol". I do.
《Processing during normal electric accessory operation》
The normal electric accessory operating process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: Normal electric accessory is operating".

In the process during operation of the normal electric accessory, the opening operation (change to the easy entry mode) and the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory are performed based on the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 set in the processing during the normal symbol stop display. While controlling (change to a difficult-to-enter mode), the establishment of the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is monitored. The operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 ends when (a) the specified number of ordinary electric accessory prizes set as the end condition of the ordinary electric accessory occurs, and (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends. This is the case (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessory has expired).

When the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is satisfied, the extension period of a fixed time determined in advance corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is measured in the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the ordinary electric accessory. Set the time. Then, the time value related to the operation end demonstration of the ordinary electric accessory is set in the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the ordinary symbol status is set to "4: During the ordinary electric accessory end demonstration".
《Demo processing to end normal electric accessory operation》
The normal electric accessory operation end demo process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: Ordinary electric accessory end demo".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demo process, the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer waits until it becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0". When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: waiting for normal symbol" is performed.

(Starting port monitoring process)
In the start port monitoring process, when the start-up data of the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), the special symbol lottery is performed. Performs the processing related to the occurrence of the hold related to. (Step 2024)
More specifically, when the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are detected, the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery is confirmed, and the number of holds does not reach the upper limit. Can store a random number as a new hold, so after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area storing the hold number and increasing the hold number information by one, the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern The random number is acquired from the random number generation circuit, or the current corresponding soft random number is acquired and stored as a hold.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, there are two types of special symbols, the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and the second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, the data of the holding number and the starting opening switch of the corresponding special symbols are called for each of the starting openings provided on the gaming board P5, the holding numbers are added to each starting opening, and random numbers are acquired. Is processed.

Further, when the starting port to be processed is composed of the starting port (electric chew) related to the ordinary electric accessory, the starting port winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is valid in the above-mentioned validity period setting process. After determining whether or not it was performed within the period, if it is within the valid period, the above-mentioned processing is performed.

When storing the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, the acquired random number information is used in advance using the advance notice judgment value table, and the fluctuation content when the fluctuation based on the various reserved random numbers is executed is performed in advance. Information that can be inferred is generated and notified to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (referred to as "preliminary determination command", "preliminary determination information", and "look-ahead determination command"). The pre-judgment command is generated for each of the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, and when transmitted to the effect control board P41, it is used for the lottery related to the execution of the "look-ahead effect" described later on the effect control board P41. Will be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes status information for managing a special symbol called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the special electric accessory called, any of the special symbol change start management (special symbol change start monitoring control process), special symbol change process, and special symbol stop symbol display process. Execute the processing.

The special symbol status includes "0: waiting for special symbol change", "1: special symbol change", "2: out-of-order symbol stop display", "3: big hit symbol stop display", "4: small hit". It has the state of "design stop display", and the status of the special electric accessory is "0: waiting for hit", "1: special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big winning opening is closed", "3". : Big hit end demonstration "," 4: Small hit special electric operation "," 5: Small hit closed "," 6: Small hit end demonstration ". Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, it may not have a small hit, and in that case, it does not have the status data related to the small hit. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

When there are a plurality of special symbols, the special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority). In a predetermined order, the process of preferentially controlling the second special symbol is performed, and in a situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the change of the second special symbol comes first. The game machine specifications that are processed so that they are started (the second special symbol changes preferentially) are called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control", and the pachinko gaming machine P is implemented as a premise. In the description of the embodiment, the processing related to this type will be described as an example.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the information of the special electric accessory status is first referred to. In the case of data indicating that the special electric bonus status is during a big hit game or a small hit game (when the special electric bonus status is other than "0: waiting for a hit"), the first special symbol is changing. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: Waiting for special symbol change", the process is completed without performing the process.

When the control of the second special symbol is executed, the process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by the process of decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area for storing the timer, and if the decremented result is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the timer update is completed, the submodule process described later is called and executed based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2. Although the timer subtraction process is also performed during the interrupt process, the timer updated by the timer subtraction process does not include the timer data updated by the special symbol control process, and the special symbol control process does not include the timer data. It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.
<< Special symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The special symbol change start monitoring control process is a submodule process that shifts when the special symbol status is “0: waiting for special symbol change”.

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold of the special symbol being processed as a target, and if there is no hold, the process is completed, and if there is a hold, the following process is executed. Subsequent processing is a special symbol lottery performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as the set value is read out and inspected, and it is determined whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the lottery table is appropriately selected with reference to the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state, etc., the winning / losing lottery, the symbol lottery, and the variable pattern lottery are executed, and the lottery result is obtained. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: Special symbol is changing". Further, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (hit / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variation effect executed according to the variation display of the special symbol. It is used as information for the determination process (lottery process). The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.
《Processing during special symbol change》
The special symbol changing process is a submodule process that shifts when the special symbol status is “1: special symbol changing”.

In the special symbol change processing, the timer that manages the change display time of the special symbol is monitored until the change time of the special symbol determined by the change pattern lottery elapses, and every interrupt is performed until the remaining change time becomes "0". The special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (when controlling the special symbol 1)) is used to display the fluctuation display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts by the updated special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24"). Performs the lighting display pattern switching process of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variation display time of the special symbol becomes "0", it indicates that the variation display of the special symbol has been executed once for the external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P. Information setting for outputting an external signal, stop display of special symbols Process for setting fixed time for displaying symbols, stop display showing stop display symbols determined as a result of win / fail lottery and symbol lottery The lighting pattern data for displaying the symbol on the special symbol display device P52 (P51) is set. Then, the special symbol status is set to one of "2: out of place symbol stop display", "3: big hit symbol stop display", and "4: small hit symbol stop display" according to the result of the winning / failing lottery.
《Processing while displaying special symbol off symbol stop》
The process of displaying the special symbol out of place symbol stop is a process of shifting to the case where the special symbol status is "2: Out of place symbol stop display in progress".

In the special symbol off symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol changing processing is "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes the processing target. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the number of remaining games in the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery is updated. At the same time as updating, it is confirmed that the end condition is satisfied, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state is performed.
<< Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display >>
The special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting to the case where the special symbol status is “3: jackpot symbol stop display in progress”.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol changing processing is "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes the processing target. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the status of the special electric accessory is updated to "2: The big winning opening is closed". Further, in order to terminate the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery, a process of clearing each remaining number of times information storage area and operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol, the information of various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot symbol information, and the special electric accessory P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set the content data.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing the effect of the jackpot game (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is further executed. Further, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator light P56 (a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the game area), which is one of the components of the main control display device P50, is recommended. Lighting pattern data for lighting the LED) that is sometimes lit is also set.
<< Processing during special symbol small hit symbol stop display >>
The special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting to the case where the special symbol status is “4: Small hit symbol stop display in progress”.

Similar to the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, the special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is performed when the symbol fixing time ends, data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 is set, and the right-handed indicator lamp P56 is turned on. Perform the relevant setting process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this premise technique, when the small hit game is executed (stop display of the small hit symbol), unlike when the big hit symbol is stopped, the game state (high probability state or high probability state) related to the special symbol lottery It does not have a process to end (high base state), and the game state is determined based on the judgment result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, as in the process of the process of processing the special symbol off symbol stop display. Control. In addition, the status of the special electric accessory will be updated to "5: Small hit closed" according to these processes. Depending on the game machine specifications, as a modification, the specifications are designed to have a process of forcibly ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) when the small hit game is executed, as in the case of stopping the big hit symbol. It is also possible.

When any of the above sub-module processes is selectively performed, the process of the first special symbol is performed following the process of the second special symbol. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the status of the special symbol of the first special symbol. The explanation is omitted because almost the same processing is only repeated in (judgment by referring to).
《Ordered entry control, parallel control》
Further, in the above-mentioned explanation of the special symbol control process, the description is based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but there are cases where a gaming machine specification different from that of the pachinko gaming machine, which is the premise of the present invention, is adopted. It is also possible to proceed with the special symbol control process by different processes. The typical ones will be briefly described below.

The "ball entry order digestion control" is a gaming machine specification in which the reserved information corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order in which they are generated. While the fluctuation of one symbol is not performed, the fluctuation display of the other is not performed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved ball corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special symbol are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "sequential digestion", and at the same time, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner. It is a type of gaming machine that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lottery per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 operates with the stop display of the special symbol of 1 (when the big hit and the small hit are executed), the other symbol is forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped or the variable display is displayed. Specifications that temporarily suspend the subtraction of the remaining time are adopted as appropriate. As an example, when one special symbol becomes a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss, and when one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
In the special electric bonus control process, the sub-module process related to the operation of the special electric bonus P755 is executed according to the data content (value) of the special electric bonus status (sometimes referred to as the special electric game status), and the special electric bonus is executed. It is a process of managing the operation of an object (step 2028). In other words, when executing a big hit game or a small hit game, it is a process of controlling each state in the big hit game and the small hit game state, and controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751.

As mentioned above, the status of the special electric accessory includes "0: waiting for a hit", "1: the special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big winning opening is closed", and "3: the big hit end demonstration". , "4: Small hit special electric operation is in progress", "5: Small hit is closed", and "6: Small hit end demonstration is in progress".

Of these special electric accessory statuses, if the status is "0: waiting for a hit", the player's game has not yet acquired the right to execute the big hit game or the small hit game. , The special electric accessory control process ends without any process.

When the status of the special electric accessory is other than "0: waiting for a hit", one of the processes described later is executed according to the status.
<< Processing during operation of special electric accessory >>
The processing during operation of the special electric accessory is a process executed when the status of the special electric accessory is "1: the special electric accessory is operating" or "4: the small hit special electric is operating". This process is a process in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the large winning opening P751 can be controlled to open).

In the process during operation of the special electric accessory, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) a specified number of winnings (also called "count") according to the activated special electric accessory, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as is completed or the opening time is satisfied. If these conditions are not satisfied, the special electric accessory control process in the current interrupt process is terminated without performing the subsequent process. In addition, in the operation pattern (opening pattern) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern for opening and closing the large winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round. While the timer used to determine (a) during the game is set to "0" multiple times, after confirming whether or not there is the next operation data during one round game, the condition (c) " When it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in this unit game, it is determined that the above (a) is satisfied.

On the other hand, when either (a) or (b) of the above conditions for ending the round game is satisfied, the closing time of the large winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory as a subsequent process. , Increment the status of the special electric accessory to "2: The big prize opening is closed". Then, command data for notifying the end of the round game is set as an effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.
《Processing while closing the big prize opening》
The processing during closing of the large winning opening is a processing executed when the status of the special electric accessory is "2: closing of the large winning opening" or "5: closing of the small hit". This process is a process in which the special game is controlled in the "between rounds" between the so-called round games, and before the start of the first round at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game. When the game is controlled by the "big hit start demo (period)" or "small hit start demo (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the hit end demo described later is executed. This is the process related to the state of being controlled during the waiting period until it becomes.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening, first, it is determined whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening set in the processing during operation of the special electric accessory has elapsed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time. If has not passed, the special electric accessory control process in the interrupt this time is terminated.

When the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, was the operation (round game) of the special electric accessory P755 that was completed first was the final round game in this hit game (big hit game, small hit game)? Judging whether or not, different processes are executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of the winning start demo). To determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 that was activated during this hit game is the maximum number of operations data of the special electric accessory P755 that was activated during this hit game. It is judged based on whether or not it exceeds, and the cumulative data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the hit start demonstration.

In the process of closing the big winning opening, if it is judged that the final round game is over, the execution pattern of the winning end demo according to the type of hit (the type of special symbol that started the big hit or small hit). Read and set (mainly hit end demo time data). Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to "3: Big hit end demo" or "6: Small hit end demo", and a production command for executing the hit end demo effect is set on the effect control board P41. To do. Further, in order to set the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the valid extension period is stored in the timer that manages the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751 and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined at the end of the game other than the final round game (or at the time of the winning start demonstration) in the process of closing the large winning opening, the next round game is the number of rounds as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify whether or not there is (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and the recommended firing position during the hit game (in the premised pachinko machine, the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game board) Send information (right-handed command) to instruct.

Then, the status of the special electric accessory is decremented and updated to "1: Special electric accessory is operating" or "4: Small hit special electric is operating", and the number of winning balls to the large winning opening P751 during the round game Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the time value related to the first opening (or closing immediately after the start of the round game) of the large winning opening P751 during the round game is set, and the operation pattern data of the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set. Then, the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is incremented.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to a player in response to a prize of a game ball for a prize opening arranged on the game board P5. The processing content is configured to execute the following three submodule processing. (Step 2030)
《Payout data reception monitoring process》
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence / absence of a control command related to the execution of the prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (memorizing) the transmitted command. .. The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). The register 1 is called a status register and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information is normally transmitted. Has been done. The other register is called a data register, and stores information on control contents related to payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is not abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. Store in the area.
<< Disbursement command request processing >>
In the payout command request process, the winning counter data for each winning opening that stores the winning count data of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed, and the presence or absence of unpaid winning is confirmed. The confirmation process is confirmed in a predetermined order for each winning opening, and when it is determined that the data of the winning counter is not "0" for one winning opening, the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning opening is determined. , Performs a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of the game ball to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for the plurality of winning openings is not "0", the payout control command transmitted to the payout control board P43 with one interrupt is limited to one.
<< Payout command control processing >>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received the information regarding the number of payouts, and whether the command is normally received in this process or it is determined that a communication error has occurred due to some abnormality. It will be. Until the command reception status is confirmed in the payout command control process (whether reception is completed normally or an error is determined), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is the payout command request process. And is temporarily suspended by the flag data that is set to be on / off in the payout command control process.

(Anomaly detection processing)
The abnormality detection process is a process for confirming the presence or absence of an abnormality from the information of the sensor provided for fraud detection in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. (Step 2032)
More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, an abnormality occurs based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). It is a process to judge whether or not the situation is present. In addition to various sensors, harnesses for electrical connection have been removed, and short circuits on wiring are also included as detection targets.

Then, if abnormal data exists for any of the judgment information, a command for notifying the error information is set as an effect control command for the effect control board P41 after storing the error data by turning on the corresponding error flag. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection determination process, the period during which the sensor or switch is continuously detected is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is the process of establishing the flag. (Step 2034)
In the sensor detection judgment process, when the level data of the detection data information of the target sensor or switch is on, the data for counting the continuous on input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not the start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the switch to be monitored is no longer on-data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, when the winning opening detection switch provided in the winning opening continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that a ball jam has occurred, and the error state is controlled to produce an effect. As a control command, a process of setting command information for causing an error notification to the effect control board P41, and a generation and output request of signal data for notifying an external device (hall computer or the like) of an error are performed.

The switch to be detected in this process includes a touch sensor switch provided on the handle P204 and a switch for detecting fraud, in order to determine whether it is due to human operation or electrical noise. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game status display processing)
The game state display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information regarding the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, the output of the display content to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by the LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating an error state, and a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) indicating the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery. P61, special figure 2 hold indicator light P62), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 that displays the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery, etc. Lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and used as data output by LED output processing. Store.

In the game status display process, when a blinking display is required for the LED indicator lamp whose lighting is controlled, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern switching process is performed by comparing the counter value and the threshold value. Will be done. For example, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of holdings of the special symbol lottery can be held up to four, but the special symbol holding indicator light is configured with two LED indicators (special figure 1 holding indicator light P61). , 2 LEDs are provided for each of the hold indicator lights P62), so if there are 3 or more holds, at least one LED will display a blinking display instead of a continuous lighting display. It is a specification to do.

(Output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to the game operation to the electric accessory which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, the payout control board P43, and the like. (Step 2038)
More specifically, when the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory or the special electric accessory is set during the normal symbol control process or the special electric accessory control process, the process during the output port output process causes the normal electric motor. Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory driving means P71 and the special electric accessory driving means P72 (solenoid in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine).

Further, a control signal (launch permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the launch of the game ball based on the handle operation of the player is generated and output to the payout control board P43 by the output port output process. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the communication status with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence status of an error requiring game stop.

(Sending control command transmission process)
The staging control command transmission process is a process of outputting a staging control command to the staging control board P41, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the staging control command is sent to the staging control board P41 only in the staging control command transmission process. It is a specification to be transmitted (step 2040). The setting of the effect control command to be transmitted is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, a storage area called a ring buffer that circularly refers to a storage destination is used as an area for storing untransmitted effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next processing called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (set) the effect control command and reading (sending) the effect control command. The specifications are such that the writing and reading of the effect control command are executed using the information for calculating the address of the storage area for writing the command and the address of the storage area for reading the command.

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the configuration of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Returning to the explanation of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing, the explanation will be given. In the effect control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the information of the write pointer and the read pointer described above match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no effect control command to be transmitted, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the data of the write pointer and the data of the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next process.

When it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and each is temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next processing.

As the staging control command, the MODE data and the EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are sequentially transmitted to the staging control board P41. First, the MODE data is set in the staging command output port, which is an output port for transmitting the staging control command to the staging control board P41, and a strobe signal for causing the staging control board P41 to perform a reading operation is output. The main control board P40 subsequently outputs EVENT data, but after performing a process with a waiting time of 26 μs in order to secure a sufficient period until the effect control board P41 receives the MODE data, the MODE data. As in the case of transmission, the EVENT data is set to the output port and the strobe signal is output. When the effect control board P41 confirms the strobe signal, it generates an effect control command reception interrupt and receives the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(External information output processing)
In the external information output processing, information on the game status and security information such as error occurrence are output as signals from the external information output terminal 77 to the external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. This is the process to be performed (step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set in the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, a pulse signal that is on potential for a certain period is transmitted. Some of them continue to output the on-potential until the condition that the signal output ends is satisfied.

In the external information output processing, first, a signal related to the game state is generated. In order to make it possible to identify the type of specific gaming state as a signal related to the gaming state, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the operating state of the probability fluctuation function (probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (base state) are set. With reference to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big hit or small hit), if the game is controlled to each game state, the external output data is transmitted so that the corresponding data is transmitted. Update. Not limited to the ones exemplified here, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, an output signal is generated based on the information indicating the presence or absence of the fluctuation time shortening function and the information indicating that the case is a specific type of jackpot. There may be cases.

Further, as the output signal output by the external information output processing, not only the signal related to the game state but also the information based on the occurrence of the predetermined game result is output. For example, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed symbol signal") transmitted each time a special symbol variation display is executed and a stop display is displayed, or a start port switch (special figure 1 start port switch P712, special figure 2 start port switch). Every time a game ball is detected for various winning openings such as 722) and the large winning opening switch P752, or the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning balls for various winning openings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Every time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal transmitted to an external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and one signal is transmitted as a pulse signal having an on-potential of 128 ms. However, when a plurality of game results are continuously generated, one signal is transmitted. After the output of the pulse signal is finished, the off-potential output for a certain period is inserted, and then the pulse signal is output again.

Further, in the external signal output processing, the data in the storage area in which the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the above-mentioned abnormality detection processing (step 2032) is stored and the comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. If it is determined that it is necessary to output a security signal by calculating and comparing with, the output data set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal of the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the progress status and the game state of the game. (Step 2044)
The LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol hold indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), and the second. Special symbol hold indicator light P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator light P54, status indicator light P55, right-handed indicator light (total) It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

The status indicator P55 collectively represents a plurality of indicator lamps related to the game status, and in detail, a special figure probabilistic indicator lamp indicating whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated, and an operation of the normal symbol probabilistic function. It refers to an indicator light such as a normal figure probability change indicator lamp that indicates the presence / absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated) and an error indicator lamp that indicates an error status.

In the LED output processing, the lighting data of the display unit in the main control display device is set in the output port by 1 byte for each interrupt processing, and the main control display device P50 is lit, and is updated every interrupt processing. Based on the value of the digit counter, select the LED of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interrupt, select the lighting pattern data according to the game situation, set it as display data, and control the lighting of each LED. It has become like.

That is, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the main control display device P50 is set to the main control display device P50 by a dynamic lighting method that outputs lighting data in order using at least four interrupt processes for 32 LEDs. I'm in control.

Further, in the LED output processing, in addition to the LED display that the player should visually recognize as the main control display device P50, the lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, or the unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, if a flag indicating some game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. During the setting change, setting confirmation, and unrecoverable error, all the LEDs constituting the main control display device are turned off. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, the light emission display may be performed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be displayed during the period when the setting is being changed. It may be configured to turn on all the LEDs constituting the above.

(Outside control processing)
The out-of-area control process is related to the test signal output process (process for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine) for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine and the display of the performance display device. It is configured by a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" indicates that the process is executed by the program of the storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area specified in the rules of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the test signal output process, processing is performed in which information related to the game result and the game state for output from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko gaming machine P to an external test device is set in the output port. In the performance display processing, the game status is confirmed, the number of out balls, the ratio (base) between the number of out balls and the number of prize balls is calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. It is a process to output.

[Special design lottery]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery".

(Win / Fail lottery)
The "win / fail lottery" is a lottery for determining whether or not the result of operating the special electric accessory P755 is based on the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed. More simply, as a lottery result of the special symbol. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" is a lottery to decide. Depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine P, there are some that do not have a "small hit" as a lottery result of the winning / failing lottery. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have a "small hit" as a lottery result of a winning / failing lottery for one special symbol, a "small hit" is given as a lottery result of the other winning / failing lottery. It may be configured so as not to have a "hit".

The win / fail lottery uses a random number called a "win / fail random number" among the random numbers acquired and stored when the game ball enters the start opening (first start winning opening P711, second start winning opening P721, etc.). And a lottery. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the range of random numbers (random number range) that can be taken by the winning / failing random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", and is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a win / fail lottery is performed, the result of the win / fail lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with the lottery table used for the win / fail lottery according to the game state and the set value (referred to as the "win / fail lottery table"). Perform processing.

FIG. 10 illustrates some lottery tables used for winning / failing lottery. FIG. 10A shows a winning / failing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a low probability state, and FIG. 10B shows a winning / failing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a high probability state. FIGS. 10 (C) and 10 (D) show the winning / failing lottery tables in the low-probability state and the high-probability state when the set value is “6”, respectively.

For example, in a situation where the winning / failing lottery is executed using the winning / failing lottery table of FIG. 10A, the winning / failing random number in the special symbol lottery this time is a random number corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is random. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the winning / failing lottery will be described.

First, it is determined whether or not the result of the first winning / failing lottery belongs to the big hit random value range (“0” to “327”). Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number value range "328" of the jackpot to be determined is performed from the random number value "1500" of the hit / miss random number this time. At this time, since the subtraction result is "1172" and does not become a negative value, it is determined that the hit / fail random number this time does not belong to the random number value range of the jackpot.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous jackpot determination is compared with the outlier random number value range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area of the subsequent winning / failing lottery result of the winning / failing lottery table. .. More specifically, the random number value range "65043" that is out of the judgment target is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the hit / fail random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, the information corresponding to the "missing" result is stored as the winning / failing lottery result.

If a special symbol lottery is performed for the winning / failing random number "1500" this time in a high probability state, the winning / failing lottery table shown in FIG. 10 (B) will be drawn, and the random number value of the first big hit. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the range ("0" to "1639"). At this time, since the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the winning / failing random number and the random number value range is a negative value, the winning / failing lottery result is determined to be a “big hit”.

The presupposed pachinko gaming machine P employs a method of determining the lottery result by sequentially comparing the data acquired as the random number value with the random number value range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning symbol lottery and the variable pattern lottery, which will be described later. The lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the value matches the big hit random value with the acquired random value may be adopted, and the lottery method differs depending on the lottery content. May be adopted.

(Winning design lottery)
In the "winning symbol lottery", in response to the winning / failing lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above, the control contents related to the subsequent operation of the special electric accessory P755 and the lottery table of the variable pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 12 to 14). ) Is a process of determining the stop display symbol of the special symbol as a lottery result required for switching.

FIG. 11 shows a jackpot symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11 (A)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is “big hit”, and when the winning / failing lottery result is “small hit”. , The small hit symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery (see FIG. 11 (B)), and the losing symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is "missing" (Fig. 11 (Fig. 11 (B)). C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used for the winning symbol lottery is configured with the random number value range as "1000" ("0" to "999"), and when expressed by 2-byte data, the upper 1 byte is "". The data is represented by "0" to "3" and the lower 1 byte is represented by "0" to "255".

Explaining the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning / failing lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (upper byte is "1", lower byte is "144"). In the case of a winning symbol lottery for a symbol, the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. 11 (A) is used, and the "5R (5 rounds) probability variation 2" corresponding to the lower bytes "128" to "191" is used. Is obtained as a lottery result, and in the variable display of the special symbol, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device). The stop display is displayed on P52).

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, there are cases where "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device and cases where "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol. The contents of the round game (opening pattern, opening time, etc. of the big winning opening P751) may be different based on the stop display symbol, and the control contents in the specific game state to be transferred after the big hit game may be controlled to be different. It is possible. The allocation of controls in these jackpot games and specific game states is appropriately determined in order to realize playability according to the specifications (specs) of each pachinko gaming machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is described that the symbols summarized for each type of jackpot are displayed by the lottery shown in FIG. 11 (A). For example, in the previous example, the lottery result " After determining the type of jackpot called "5R probability variation 2", the type of jackpot is determined so that the stop display symbol that will execute the jackpot of the corresponding type is determined by performing another lottery from multiple patterns. , The stop display symbol may be determined and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two stages.

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the big hit symbol is determined by the winning symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , The types of hit symbols that can be determined are configured to be different. More specifically, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, there is an increasing possibility that "10R probability variation 5" or "10R probability variation 8" will be determined in the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big hit with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easier to win a big hit that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11B exemplifies a small hit symbol lottery table. The small hit symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "small hit", and the lottery method is the time of the above-mentioned big hit symbol lottery table. Is similar to.

In the small hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11B, most of them win the "small hit 1" symbol, and when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing lottery is "small hit". "Small hit 2" can be determined in a part of. The small hit symbol may be of one type, or may be configured so that three or more types of symbols can be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small hit symbols like the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game. In order to separate the small hit game that makes it easy to win a V in a specific area and the small hit game that makes it difficult to win a V in a pachinko gaming machine P that uses a small hit V as a game machine specification (spec), for example. The purpose is to differentiate the small hit symbols, or to make different small hit symbols in order to separate the types of specific games to be transferred after the execution of the big hit game after the V prize is executed.

FIG. 11C illustrates an out-of-design lottery table. The missed symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "missing", and the lottery method is the jackpot symbol lottery described above for the first special symbol. It is the same as the time of the table, and the method is different for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11C shows only the missing symbol lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, it is the first special symbol as the missing symbol lottery table. Only in this case, the lottery process is performed, and either "Wrong 1" or "Wrong 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "Wrong Answer 2" symbol is a missed symbol that is won with a probability of about 6.4% when the first special symbol is missed, and if "Wrong Answer 2" is won, it is likely to reach in the variable pattern lottery. It is configured to facilitate the determination of a variation pattern (variation time) with reference to a special lottery table (not shown). Therefore, the "Wrong Answer 2" may be referred to as a "reach-missing symbol" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, does not have a lottery table for the second special symbol, and even if it is any symbol random number, the missing symbol of 1 is determined. The comparison process itself of the table is omitted, and it is configured to store the missing symbol of 1. It should be noted that the lottery table that always wins one symbol may be used so as to win the out-of-order symbol.

(Variable pattern lottery)
The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining the variable display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed by lottery. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is used as the production time required to notify the effect of whether or not the effect display device P80 is a big hit and what kind of big hit is the type of the big hit. The fluctuation display time of is determined by using the fluctuation pattern table described later.

In FIG. 12, a gaming ball is launched into the left side region P501L of the gaming board mainly in a normal gaming state (low probability / low base medium) and a low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. Represents the "low-based medium-variable pattern lottery table" in the recommended state.

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of performing the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the staging display device P80 when the ID is won. A typical example of the mode of effect of fluctuation is shown. The "variable time" is a variable display time value of the special symbol in the result of the target variable pattern lottery (variable pattern ID), and represents the time from the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display.

In FIG. 12, "Take 1 fluctuation" to "Take 4 fluctuation" indicate the number of holdings in the situation where the execution condition of the special symbol lottery is satisfied, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is "missing", and the target special symbol (here). Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of the “holding N fluctuation”. That is, the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state is configured to make the variation pattern table to be used different depending on the number of reservations. If a game ball enters the starting winning opening in a state where there is no hold, it is temporarily stored as a hold for processing, so a fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Holding 1 fluctuation". To.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variable pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of holdings, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of holdings. Although not shown, if "Wrong Answer 2 (Wrong Answer 2)" is determined as a result of the symbol lottery, even in the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, the variation of 1 does not depend on the number of holdings. It is configured to perform a variation pattern lottery using a pattern table (variation pattern table for Wrong Answer 2).

“10R probability variation”, “5R probability variation”, “10R normal”, and “5R normal” in FIG. 12 indicate a variation pattern table used for a variation pattern lottery at the time of a big hit in a low base state, and the result of the winning / failing lottery. Is a "big hit", indicating that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting a variable pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the main player of the game in the low base state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form that does not depend on the jackpot symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol is also expressed. , There may be a plurality of patterns depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the random number of the fluctuation pattern is "30000" and the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation is 3 (the number of reserved balls is 2 after the start of the fluctuation). The situation in which the result of the winning / failing lottery and the winning symbol lottery are "missing 1" will be described.

First, since the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "holding 3 fluctuation" is used. Similar to the lottery process in the winning / failing lottery described above, the lottery process compares (subtracts) the variable pattern random number and the random number value range corresponding to the variable pattern ID of each lottery result, and determines whether or not the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number value range at the timing of the normal fluctuation B of ID "2" becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery, which is special. After the variation display for 7 seconds is performed as the variation display of the symbol, the misaligned symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state is symmetrical to that of the fluctuation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. It is configured to have a table and a table for each jackpot symbol at the time of jackpot. In addition, although it is configured in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and is determined in the low base state and the high base state. It is possible to configure the variation patterns to have very few overlaps or no overlaps at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the shortest fluctuation time of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is obtained as the lottery result of the "ho 3 fluctuation" and "ho 4 fluctuation" of the second special symbol at the time of off. A 2-second variation (variation pattern ID "12") can be determined.

Further, as a feature point of the fluctuation pattern in the high base state, the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern ID “4” for 10 seconds is always determined. The reason why the first special symbol is composed of the fluctuation of 10 seconds is that the player profit is large when the jackpot is hit in the jackpot symbol lottery table shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot symbols that shift to the probability fluctuation state as a specific game state), and by prioritizing and implementing a large number of variation displays corresponding to the second special symbol, a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. The purpose is to be able to acquire. Further, even when there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage of the big hit game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is based on the fact that the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted. It is easy to hold the hold established in the normal gaming state (low base state) until the end of the specific gaming state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, avoiding variable display, and the second in the high base state. It is also an object to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to cause the hold of the first special symbol in a low base state with respect to the amount of game balls used to generate the hold of the special symbol.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table in a limited period and represents a special variation pattern table referenced in a specific period. FIG. 14 comprehensively describes a special fluctuation pattern table for three periods as an example of a special fluctuation pattern table provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

More specifically, in FIG. 14, the period from the first fluctuation to the fourth fluctuation after the big hit (the so-called "holding ream" (reserved inner ream), in which the four holdings existing at the time of the big hit become a big hit, is called. It is easy to select the reach fluctuation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the nth to mth fluctuations after the big hit and the "reserved inner consecutive villa table" (for IDs "51" and "71") referred to in the period). It is referred to in the high frequency reach table (for IDs "52", "53", "54", "72") and the final fluctuation display in the high base state, and the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that the "result fluctuation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") to be used is provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

Such a special variation pattern table referred to in a limited period is referred to as a "special variation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to in a predetermined period after the big hit game (operation of special electric accessory, in other words, operation of continuous accessory operation device). are doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to make the presence or absence of reference different depending on the type of jackpot (big hit symbol), and the reference period can be set in a specific period after the operation of the special electric accessory based on the small hit game. It can also be configured to be different. What kind of special fluctuation pattern table is referred to under what circumstances can be appropriately set for each pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to the illustrated ones, and the details should be explained separately if necessary. And.

Next, the control of the staging control board P41 that controls the staging operation in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, will be described. The operation control of the staging control board P41 has few restrictions on the type test of the gaming machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, and is therefore described in the following description. It is not limited only to the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of staging control board-main loop processing]
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the power-on process (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the staging control board P41. Here, the details of the power-on processing of the staging control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started on the staging control board P41 of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the initial setting process related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the staging control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process appropriately performs the settings necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details are omitted. However, regarding the effect that was executed in the state where the power was cut off last time, the main control board P40 Since there is a time lag between the completion of the power-on process (FIG. 7) and the power-on process of the staging control board (FIG. 15), if the staging before the power failure is restored after the power is restored, the operation of the main control board P40 will occur. Since there is a risk of misalignment, in the initial processing when the effect control board P41 recovers from a power failure, the effect information and the like are often initialized so that the effect that was executed before the power failure is not executed (“effect). Control board reset ", called" sub reset ").

(Main loop of staging control board)
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the process shifts to the main loop process after the initial setting process. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the time of the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image on the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to about 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is configured to be performed once in a cycle of 16 ms, which is about half of the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop process of the staging control board P41, first, the watchdog timer for detecting the runaway of the CPU is cleared (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers to be used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, the input port monitoring process is executed (step 4008). The premise of the pachinko gaming machine P is designed to monitor the input port even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later, but the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing is monitoring with a 16 ms cycle. Therefore, the monitoring of the input of the switch or the like, which is a necessary monitoring target on the system, is limited, and the monitoring of the input of the sensors and the like necessary for the effect control of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modification, the sensors to be monitored in the production may be confirmed by the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

Similar to the input port confirmation process on the main control board, the content to be executed in the input port monitoring process is the process of generating and storing level data from the input data of various sensors and storing the rising (falling) data. Will be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs the effect device control process (step 4010) to execute control related to the effect operation other than the effect display device P80 (image display). Examples of the staging device controlled in this process include a lamp P82 (“board lamp (P550)” and “frame lamp (P350)”), a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), and a staging movable accessory P560. For these effect devices, an effect operation command corresponding to the effect content determined to be executed by a process such as an effect control process (step 4012) described later is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

Since the output of the staging operation command to the various staging devices in the staging device control process (step 4010) needs to be executed (started) in synchronization with the staging image displayed on the staging display device P80 (image display device). , The image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 has received a signal transmitted to the effect control board P41 at regular intervals and a signal for forcibly synchronizing (the above-mentioned input port monitoring process). (Reception in) as an opportunity to synchronize with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and output an effect operation command to various effect devices.

Regarding the operation control of the staging movable accessory P560 in the staging device, since it is necessary to control the driving means of the staging movable accessory P560 in a shorter cycle, the staging set in this process. Regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the operation command, sensor monitoring and operation switching are executed even during interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41 described later.

Next, the staging control process (step 4012) executed in the main loop process of the staging control board P41 will be described. In the staging control process, the flag established based on the result of analyzing the staging control command received from the main control board P40 in the staging control command analysis process described later and the information of the received staging control command itself (lottery result ID of special symbol lottery, etc.) ), Input port monitoring process (step 4008), interrupt process (FIG. 16), and other processes. Is.

The staging control process selects a staging decision process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes a submodule process for the corresponding staging decision. As an example of the effect content determined here, the process of determining the variation effect corresponding to one change of the special symbol based on the commands (win / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery. (Processing to determine the content of the notice and reach, the decorative pattern to be stopped, etc.), and the look-ahead effect for the newly generated hold based on the hold number information and pre-judgment information sent when the hold occurs (" The pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute the "pre-judgment effect") and the effect content during the special game are determined based on the information sent as the effect control command when the special game (big hit or small hit) is executed. There is a special game production content determination process to be performed.

Further, the staging control process is not only a process for the staging control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also a process for determining the error display content when an error is detected on the staging control board P41 (an error transmitted from the main control board). (Including the process of determining the error display content based on information), adjusting the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the input operations of the effect button P381, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81 by the player, and the lamp P82. It also executes the determination of the effect content such as adjusting the amount of light to change the emission brightness of the image, and customizing the effect content and the effect determination tendency.

It should be noted that, as for the process of determining various effect contents performed in the sub-module process called in the effect control process, specifications specific to each gaming machine are often used, so the explanation is omitted and the subject of the invention is made. When the processing having a feature is executed in the pachinko gaming machine P, the details will be described in the description of the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P which is the object of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop process of the staging control board, the staging control command analysis process (step 4014) will be described as the final process of the main loop process.

The staging control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the staging control command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the information corresponding to the staging control command to be used for determining the staging content in the staging control process described above. And set the flag. In this processing, it is necessary to determine the processing content according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the processing content is determined from the contents of the MODE data and EVENT data which are the staging control commands, and the staging control command is responded to. Processing is executed.

As for the effect control command, one command (MODE data and EVENT data) may be transmitted for each interrupt process (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40. Until the main loop processing cycle (16 ms) of the board P41 elapses, the analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as much as possible (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of staging control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the staging control board P41 will be described. The interrupt processing on the staging control board P41 is different from the interrupt processing on the main control board, and has a plurality of interrupt processing started at different execution triggers (see FIGS. 16A and 16B). Priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and when an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the higher interrupt process is executed even while the interrupt process is being executed. Is controlled by. In this description, the staging control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16 (A)) and the staging control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) will be described as representatives.

(Stage control timer interrupt processing)
The effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16A) is an interrupt process executed in a cycle of 1 ms in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

The port input / output process (step 5002) is performed by inputting a sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 or another sensor (input sensor of the effect operation means P81) from the input port of the effect control board P41. From the output port to the process of generating and storing level data and rising data from the output port, and driving the effect movable accessory P560 drive means (such as solenoids and stepping motors) according to the operation pattern set in the effect device control process. The process of outputting a signal is executed. When data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) that counts the number of outputs is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the staging operation. When the update process for each timer is completed, a comparison operation with the comparison value is performed to determine whether or not a switching condition for the effect operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the effect content in the effect control process (step 4012). Performs the process of storing the flag in the storage area.

In the sensor monitoring process (step 5006), the sensor detection information related to the switching of the staging operation, such as whether or not the staging operation switching condition of the staging movable accessory P560 is satisfied, is based on the sensor detection data generated by the port input / output process. It is determined whether or not the occurrence of the above is generated, and a process of switching the table of the operation pattern is performed, or a process of setting a condition flag for determining the effect content is performed in the effect control process (step 4012).

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for determining whether or not the effect switching condition is satisfied based on the input of the effect button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device generated in the port input / output process (step 5002) and the rising data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous off to the current on) are used for the effect. It is determined whether or not the operation means P81 is operated and the operation mode is determined.

For example, when the rising data is generated as the input information for the staging operation means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the staging operation means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding staging is stored. .. If the input is judged only by the rising data, it may be erroneously detected due to electrical noise and the staging operation may be switched. Therefore, after the rising data is generated, the level data (on-data) is input multiple times. It may be determined that the player operation (may be expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") for the staging operation means P81 triggered by the continuous operation.

Further, when the on-input level data is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the staging operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined to be a "long press (long press)" operation. It is configured to be treated as a special operation. In addition, the fall data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous on to the off this time) may be electrically detected as noise when determining whether or not to perform the "long press (long press)" operation and whether to continue. In this case as well, as in the case of the above-mentioned false detection prevention measures, after the fall data is detected, the input of the "long press (long press)" operation is input based on the detection of multiple level data (off data) inputs. It may be used to determine the end.

Then, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means once at regular intervals (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the process of assuming that there was a "single push (single pull)" input operation on P81, and in this way, with a special operation such as a "long press (long pull)" operation as an opportunity, It is called an "automatic continuous hit" operation that the repeated processing is executed assuming that the "single push" operation has been performed. The "automatic continuous striking" operation is not limited to the operation content illustrated, but can be operated by simultaneously operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 or by operating an on / off operation such as a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button. It is also possible to adopt a method in which it is considered that the "automatic continuous hitting" operation is executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

The input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as an effective operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

The multitasking process (step 5010) is the effect control generated this time according to the value of the task counter (updated between the values "0" and "15") that is updated every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed. This is a process performed by different processing contents to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate in a cycle of 16 ms, and the process at each counter value is configured to be executed substantially in synchronization with one cycle of the main loop process. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on the signal transmitted from the image control board P42 (input information is generated by port input / output processing), and an image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operating status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) includes an image control command (“inter-sub command”) so that the CPU of the image control board P42 executes an image display according to the effect content determined by the effect control process P41. This is a process of transmitting (sometimes called) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the staging control board P41 may be made of the same board, they are described as the image control board P42 in the present specification for convenience.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the effect control board P41 is composed of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command specifying a pattern of display content, and the image control board P41 is used on the image control board P42. It is configured to send.

The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, is configured to transmit image control commands by the effect control timer interrupt process, but the transmission / reception of commands between the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 is separately performed. It is also possible to provide interrupt processing to perform transmission and reception.

(Stage control command reception interrupt)
The staging control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) outputs a strobe signal in the staging control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and outputs the strobe signal to the staging control board. This is an interrupt process generated when P41 receives a signal.

When the effect control board P41 starts the effect control command reception interrupt, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step). 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data is completed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the effect control command (combination of MODE data and EVENT data) of 1 is completed (step 5506). The staging control command transmitted from the main control board P40 is composed of "1" and "0" for specific bits in the 1-byte data.
When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, a process of storing the contents of the effect control command received this time is normally performed in the lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if it is indicated that a specific bit part of the lower 1 byte of the storage area of the current temporary buffer data is MODE data before the update, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1 byte storage area. After the data is stored, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of the completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not the specific bit in the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is the data indicating the EVENT data, and it is determined that the data is the EVENT data. In that case, the process proceeds to the next process assuming that the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506YES), and when it is determined that the data is MODE data (step 5506NO), the EVENT data is transmitted from the main control board P40. Until the strobe signal based on the above is received, the effect control command reception interrupt is exited, other processing is performed, and the process waits.

When it is determined in step 5506 that the reception of the effect control command is completed, it is determined whether or not the sent effect control command is normal (step 5508). This process is determined based on, for example, whether or not matching data exists in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in the storage area for storing the received effect control command so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process. In case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic production of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base), and FIG. 18 is a reach effect with a high expectation of being a big hit. It is a figure showing the situation. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during the operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). It is a figure.

(Example of staging display in normal game state)
《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in a manner that can be clearly confirmed by the player. These three symbols are called "decorative symbols (P801)" (also called "designation"), and are staging displays displayed in response to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation of the special symbols. It is displayed in a variable manner according to the display. Although it is represented only by numbers in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decorative image such as a character image. Further, when it is configured to display each number with a decorative image, the decorative image and the display mode of each number may be different depending on the game state. With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the current gaming state.

In the decorative symbol P801, the variable display as one effect is performed for each variation display of the special symbol (one special symbol lottery) except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative symbol P801 is variablely displayed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (transparently displayed or hidden in some cases) at high speed, and the image of the animation or the effect is displayed. A production called "notice" will be used to raise expectations for the acquisition of rights to big hit games.

The decorative symbol P801 shown in FIG. 17 is scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left symbol (P801a), the right symbol (P801c), and the middle symbol (P801b) are displayed in this order. The stop display symbol determined by the effect control board P41 is stopped and displayed for each symbol row. Generally, when three decorative symbols P801 are stopped and displayed in the same manner (doublet), it is aptly notified that it is a big hit. Further, a state in which one symbol is displayed in a variable manner while another symbol is displayed, for example, the left symbol before the middle symbol P801b, which is the last symbol to stop (also referred to as “final stop symbol”), stops. The state in which the right symbol is displayed with the same symbol (temporary stop display) is called "reach" ("reach state" or "reach mode").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the variable display mode is not limited to the vertical direction, and the front-back direction (horizontal direction and depth) are used. The scroll display operation may be performed in the (diagonal) direction, or the rotation operation may be performed on the spot without scrolling and the switching display may be performed in order.

Further, the decorative symbol P801 has a case where the stop display is performed a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol once. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display indicating the result of the special lottery is a stop display displayed at the same time as the stop display symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The stop display at a timing other than the above is called "temporary stop (display)". In addition, the stop display at the same time as the stop display of the special symbol may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display (main stop), and the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped to the extent that it is not recognized as fixed. It is configured to move, move in a direction such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "sway fluctuation" in addition to the temporary stop.

After the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped, the variation display may be repeated again. Generally, the re-variation from the state in which the symbols other than the jackpot symbol are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo variation (pseudo-ream)" effect. , The re-variation that may change the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped is called "promotion (variation)" effect. When the promotion effect is executed, it may be configured not to be changed to a jackpot symbol that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot symbol, or may be configured not to be changed to a lost symbol.

In addition, when the decorative symbol P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative symbol that is not displayed during the normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804) ”(special symbol). The special drawing has a meaning in each symbol, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot is executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect is performed, or a specific reach effect (a reach mode). There is something that suggests that the notice effect (displayed in case) is executed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as the decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) that is temporarily stopped at the end, or one of the left symbol P801a, the middle symbol P801b, and the right symbol P801c are all substituted. A special symbol may be temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol.
<< Simple drawing (mini drawing) >>
At the upper right of the screen, three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol P801 are displayed. This symbol is also called "simple design (P802)"("simplifieddesign") or "mini design", and like the above-mentioned "decorative design", it shows the lottery result of the special design according to the variable display of the special design. It is displayed as a display object.

The simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design" in that the special design showing the result of the special lottery is a special design even when the decorative design P801 is not stopped and displayed. In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, the stop display is always performed once for each special symbol lottery.

Further, the variable display of the simplified design P802 may be configured to form the same reach mode when the above-mentioned decorative symbol P801 has the reach mode, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, even if a simple variable display method is adopted, such as a constant display switching is performed until the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.
<< Hold display area >>
A hold display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the hold display area P810, the hold object P811 corresponding to the hold (random value) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the right of the special symbol lottery acquired by the player. In the example of FIG. 17, three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the special symbol lottery is executed (that is, the earlier hold) is displayed at a position closer to the substantially center direction at the bottom of the screen, and the hold display area P810 is displayed. The display position of the reserved object located on the far right side of is called "Ho 1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, "Ho 2 (display area)", "Ho 3 (display area)", and "Ho 4 (ho 4) Display area) ".

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the hold display area P810, an object having substantially the same mode as the hold object P811 of the hold display area P810 is displayed at a higher position than the hold object P811. This display area continuously displays the hold display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the start of the current special symbol change display from the hold display area, and is referred to as "the change object display area (P812)". .. Further, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is referred to as "the variable object (P813)", but may be referred to as "the pending display" or the like, and is differentiated from the reserved object P811 in the reserved display area P810. Therefore, the acronym "corresponding" is added.

The display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the reserved object P811, and the reserved display accompanying the start of the variable movement is moved and displayed in the variable object display area P812. At that time, the shape may be changed or disappeared (hidden). Further, the variable object P813 may be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same manner as the hold display in the hold change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at the timing during the change display). ).
《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially center position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of holdings of the first special symbol and the number of holdings of the second special symbol, and are called "simple holding display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. ..

(Look-ahead production)
《Pending change look-ahead》
Further, in FIG. 17, the hold object P811 in the hold 3 display area in the hold display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the hold object P811 in the display areas of the hold 2 and the hold 1. The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, is configured so that the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 3 is more likely to be a big hit than the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 2. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold object P811 and displaying it for a specific hold is called "hold change (look-ahead)".

It should be noted that the object is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 17, but has a plurality of types of change modes, each of which is configured so that the possibility of a big hit (expectation degree) can be different, and the reserved object P811 is stepwise. The display mode of the above may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "hold change (look-ahead)", when the random value stored as hold is determined as the execution target of the effect, the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the execution target of the effect is started. A production that suggests that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit on hold, which was the target of the production prior to the execution of the production, is called a "look-ahead effect" (sometimes referred to as a "preliminary judgment effect"). I'm out.

Then, when the "look-ahead effect" is executed, the hold determined as the hold for which the effect is executed may be referred to as "look-ahead target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", or the like. , The change display of the special symbol based on the look-ahead target hold is referred to as "look-ahead target change", "trigger change", "criminal change" and the like.

Here, as a "look-ahead effect", some typical ones that can be adopted in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be illustrated.
《Chance look ahead》
"Chance pre-reading" is a stop display (or temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol P801 according to a predetermined rule in the variation display of the decorative symbol P801 until the fluctuation of the pre-reading target variation is started. It is a production to be done. As an example of the rule of the stop display mode of the decorative symbol P801 predetermined as a chance eye, (a) when the color of the numerical part of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed depending on the combination of only the same symbols, (b). When the stop symbols of decorative symbols such as "1", "2", "3", "5", "4", and "3" are displayed in a regular stop display mode such as in order (forward order, reverse order). (C) When a special number such as "7" or a symbol different from the number such as "destination" is stopped and displayed as a stop display symbol of the middle symbol.
《Pre-reading of movable characters》
"Pre-reading of the staging movable accessory" is a pre-reading of the staging movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). It is a production that makes a lively operation from the start of the fluctuation according to the effect operation pattern, straddling the variation until the variation display of the target variation is started or the look-ahead target variation.
《Zone transition look-ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" shifts to a special effect mode (called "zone") in the change display of the special symbol before the look-ahead target change starts, and is special until the change display that becomes the look-ahead target change. It is a look-ahead effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a different effect mode. For example, "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading-> big hit" or "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading-> stop off symbol and return to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach production)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach effect with a high expectation of becoming a big hit is being performed. As described above, the "reach effect" is a situation in which decorative symbols (left symbol P801a, right symbol P801c) other than one decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more symbol is displayed. It refers to the production in a state where it is notified that a big hit will occur if the vehicle is stopped in the same mode.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, in many cases, the specifications are such that the three decorative symbols P801 have the same stop display mode via the reach effect to notify the jackpot.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c of the decorative symbol are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the symbols of the changing medium symbol row. It shows a situation where the "4" symbol vibrates violently and if it switches to "5", it becomes a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the display of the left symbol and the right symbol “5” of the decorative symbol is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of the stop display of FIG. 17, and the middle symbol in the variable display is displayed. The decorative symbol P801b in the column is displayed larger than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of stop display and is highlighted. The small decorative symbol corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c at this time may be referred to as a "evacuation symbol (P803)", a "reach symbol", or the like. In the reach effect, in addition to the illustrated example, it is notified whether or not the animation of the notice effect (reach effect) displayed along with the variable display of the decorative pattern will be a big hit depending on the end. In some cases, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c that have already been temporarily stopped are displayed (or hidden) in a smaller size than the retracted symbol P803 so that the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to is enhanced. ing.

Further, a gaming machine or the like in which the number of decorative symbols P801 displayed is not three is known, and there is also a multi-line reach or the like that forms a reach mode of a plurality of rows at the same time, but a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the reach effect, there is a reach effect called "full rotation reach" in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variablely displayed in the same manner. What is the standard for reach production, "a situation in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same mode, and a state in which it is notified that a big hit will occur if one more symbol stops in the same mode". Although the situation is different, full rotation reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach effect.

Further, in FIG. 18, the “effect setting display area (P850)” is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, the volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The effect setting display area P850 includes a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the gaming machine P, a light amount adjusting function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decorative lamp P82 of the gaming machine P, and an effect mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and the change status of the effect mode change function for changing the type of the notice effect to be generated and the frequency of occurrence of the advance notice effect.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, and is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation related to the various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function) described above. It is displayed, and for example, it is possible to display the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. 18 by operating the cross key P383 in the left-right direction. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the right button of the cross key P383 is further operated by the player, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value starts from "3". It has come to change to "4".

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when adjusting the amount of light, the change operation is configured to be performed by operating the cross key P383 in the vertical direction, and the effect mode change function is configured according to the operation of the effect button. An example is given in which the production modes are switched in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of the effect during the game, and can be appropriately adopted in addition to the illustrated setting change method.

Further, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set the period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and the period during which the player's effect setting operation is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is invalidated.

(Example of staging display during big hit game)
Subsequently, based on FIG. 19, a display mode of the effect in a state where the big hit game is being executed on the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described.
<< Production display showing the type of jackpot >>
At the lower left of the screen and the upper right of the screen of FIG. 19, the decorative symbol P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. The lower left of the screen displays the decorative symbol P801 (also referred to as "big hit design (P805)") of 1 in a display mode smaller than the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, as in the case of executing the reach effect described above, and the upper right of the screen. Continues to display the simplified drawing P802 displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is completed.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the type of jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot are determined by the type of the decorative symbol P801 (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurs) that triggered the occurrence of the jackpot. It suggests the degree of expectation of the game and the game state (normal game state) after the big hit. Therefore, by displaying the decorative symbols (big hit design P805, simple symbol P802) that triggered the execution of the jackpot in this way, the type of jackpot and the number of game balls expected to be acquired can be determined even during the jackpot game. It is possible to suggest.

Further, as a display indicating the type of the jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed under the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"). The character "MAX" is written in the center of P821. The icon P821 in the figure is a jackpot suggested by the character string "MAX", and indicates that the maximum round jackpot game possessed by the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "big hit icon" or a "ream villa (display) icon", and each time a specific game state and a big hit game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively side by side, so-called "ream villa". It is an effect display that informs the player how many times and what kind of jackpot has been won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, "○○ bonus!" (Notifying the maximum round jackpot) and "○○ bonus!" By displaying "△△ chance" (suggesting a big hit that is not the maximum round), an effect of notifying the player of the type of big hit is executed.

In addition, even if it is suggested that the jackpot is a big hit such as "△△ chance" where the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the jackpot is set as "extra bonus! + ○ round" during the jackpot round. In fact, it is also possible to perform a "big hit promotion effect" such as notifying that it is a big hit in the maximum round.

In addition, the "big hit promotion effect" is also used when it is suggested that a big hit game that shifts to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified type of big hit is being executed. There are times. For example, from the production of a jackpot game (called "non-probability variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot") that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the jackpot game, the jackpot game ("" There is an effect display such that the effect display is switched to the effect of "probability change jackpot" and "specific jackpot").
<< Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game >>
Next, when the jackpot game is executed, the effect display showing the progress of the jackpot game will be described. In FIG. 19, as an effect showing a big hit effect display, a “round display (P820)” executed by a character string display of “ROUND_〇” at the upper left of the screen, and a character string display of “TOTAL_〇〇pt” at the lower right of the screen. Examples include the "acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in, and the "count display (P825)" displayed by 10 circular image objects in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed in addition to these displays during the big hit game.
《Round display》
The "round display (P820)" is a display indicating the number of rounds of the round game (unit game) being executed during the big hit game. The value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated when the round game starts. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which a round game of the sixth round is being executed.

The "round display (p820)" does not necessarily have to be synchronized with the number of execution rounds during the actual jackpot game. For example, in the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications, the small hit game may be counted as the first round, and the first round of the big hit game executed after winning the V may be treated as the second round. Further, in another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with the transition to the easy entry state for a short time, the value of the "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening is not updated. Only when the opening pattern of is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball for a long time, it may be treated as a substantially executed round "substantial round".
《Display the number of acquired balls》
The "number of acquired balls display (P822)" sandwiches the specific game with the "display of the number of acquired balls (P823 * not shown)" that displays the number of game balls accumulated in one big hit game being executed. There is a type such as "cumulative acquired ball number display (824)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired in a plurality of big hits. FIG. 19 shows an example in which the “cumulative acquired ball number display (P824)”, which is a 5-digit acquired ball number display, is displayed. The "big hit winning ball number display (P823)" and the "cumulative winning ball number display (P824)" may be displayed simultaneously in parallel.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the number of balls entered into the big prize opening P751 during the big hit game is displayed for the "number of acquired balls display (P822)". However, as the cumulative target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payouts based on the winning balls to the general winning opening P731 and the second starting winning opening P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 are cumulatively added. You may.

Further, as another modification, the display period of the "acquired ball number display (P822)" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the execution of the specific game, or the "acquired ball number display (P822)". The addition period of the cumulative prize ball payout number may be configured to be extended not only during the big hit game but also during the specific game or the small hit game.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in addition to the "number of acquired balls displayed (P822)", the accumulated number of prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in special situations such as when the number of payouts is reached, it is possible to execute the "separated number of acquired balls display" effect in addition to the "acquired ball number display" to notify the player (for example, "GET 10000! ! ”).
《Count display》
The "count display (P825)" indicates how many more balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the large winning opening P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in this round game. It is a display indicating whether or not the ball has entered the large winning opening P751. The former is displayed as a shaded circular object in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object as a two-column object display at a substantially center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the game of the sixth round, 5 balls have already been entered into the big winning opening (displayed as a white circular object), and 5 more balls can be entered (with a shaded circular object). Display) is indicated by the count display P825. The display of the count display P825 is reset to the initial mode each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the big hit game, the number of game balls exceeds the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 in succession to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 depending on the flow condition of the game balls. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning of the number of game balls exceeding such a closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over prize" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, or a special light emission of the effect lamp P82 or a special sound effect is emitted from the speaker P83. It may be notified by such means. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned acquired ball number display P822, the number of prize balls paid out based on the prize that is the “over prize” may be added or excluded from the addition.
<< Other production display during big hit game >>
Next, another effect display in which the effect display is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the above-mentioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decorative design (big hit design P805) at the lower left of the screen is "selected music display (P854)" indicating the title of the music being played during the current big hit game. .. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be played by operating the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 during the first and second rounds during the big hit game. Has specifications. Regarding the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image "Can be changed with the (up) (down) key" is displayed in the vicinity of the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the selection of the effect during such a big hit game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round effect and select the effect (effect mode) during the specific game after the big hit game (collectively). (Called "Production Customized Display (P853)"), detailed explanations of them are omitted.

Finally, the "right-handed" and right-handed arrow symbols displayed at the bottom of the simplified drawing P802 at the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "separate notification (P830)" (also called "recommended launch position notification"). Is. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, since it is recommended to launch a game ball into the right area P501R of the game area during the big hit game, "right-handed notification (P832)" ("right-handed") (Display of the character string and the right arrow symbol) is being executed.

The "separate notification" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state is switched (occurrence / end of a big hit or generation / end of a specific game state), a larger size display than the separate notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 so that the player can easily recognize it. Is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen or the like to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next gaming state.

In addition, in the "separation notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first distribution notification image" ("right-handed large display (P831)", " Left-handed large display (P833) "), and the recommended firing position in the game state during the big hit game or the specific game state is displayed for almost the entire period during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "notification image" ("right-handed small display (P832)", "left-handed small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "striking notification (P830)", when a situation in which a game ball is launched at a position other than the recommended firing position is detected, for example, the left area of the game area during a big hit. "Left-handed warning notice" ("Right-handed warning (P835)" that alerts the player that the game ball should be fired in the right area P501R of the game area when the game ball is fired in P501L. ) To display a message such as "Please hit right". In a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, the "right-handed warning notification" ("left-handed warning notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of staging display during a specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). Although a wide variety of staging displays are shown in the figure, the explanations for those explained in the above explanation are omitted, and the staging displays that have not been explained so far and the differences from the above explanations. An explanation will be given regarding the staging display having the above.

First, as the effect display that has not been explained so far, the "effect mode display (P840)" and the "remaining game count display (P841)" will be described as the effect display during the specific game state.
《Production mode display》
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display showing the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is drawn by the state information called the effect mode. .. When the effect mode display is different, the types of advance notice effects that are visually recognized by the player are generally made so that the impression given to the appearance is significantly different, although there are some common advance notice effects. .. In FIG. 20, the display "RUSH_MODE" is made, and the display indicating that the gaming state in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" (high probability / high base state) is displayed. ing.

In addition to notifying the effect mode in the specific game state, the "effect mode display (P840)" may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), or one game. When the state has a plurality of effect modes, the display may be temporarily performed each time the condition for switching the effect mode is satisfied, or may be continuously performed until the effect mode ends.
《Display the number of remaining games》
The "remaining game count display (P841)" is a display of changes in the special symbol until the end of the specific game state (number of special symbol lottery) and a change display of the special symbol until the current production mode ends. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, the display of "remaining_56" is executed in the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (number of times cut probability change)" is performed until 56 more special symbol lottery is executed. Notify the person.

Next, in the effect display example of the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, a display different from the effect display example in the other game states described above will be described.
<< Decorative design (specific game state) >>
In the center of the screen of FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed. In the effect display example of the decorative symbol P801 in the specific game state of FIG. 20, the display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed smaller than that of the decorative symbol P801 of the effect display example in the normal gaming state of FIG. 20.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the effect mode display P840, the remaining number of games display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are displayed at the upper part of the screen as the effect display of the specific game state, and the selected music is displayed at the lower part of the screen. P854 and P824 for displaying the number of acquired balls are performed. In the specific gaming state, such an additional display that is not displayed in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) is performed. Therefore, if the decorative symbol P801 is displayed in the same size as the normal gaming state, the stop display is displayed. At this time, the display of some symbols may overlap with a part of each display, which may cause a problem that the visibility of the stop display symbol is lowered. The display of the decorative design P801 is made small and simplified so that Further, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative symbol P801, it is possible to adopt a method of reducing the size and not displaying a character image or the like attached to a number indicating the symbol.
<< Hold display area (specific game state) >>
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen of FIG. 20, as the display of the hold object P811 in the hold display area P810 of the specific game state, from the front side of the screen toward the depth direction, from "ho 1" to "ho 1". A display area for the reserved object of "Holding 4" is provided. The display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the effect mode state of "RUSH_MODE".

When the variation display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new variation starts in the state, the display of the reserved object P811 located at the bottom of FIG. 20 disappears, and the display of the reserved object P811 lined up in the back moves to the front. The display is controlled so that the display becomes large.

In addition, although not shown, the "result display effect", which is an important effect as an effect displayed during a specific game, will be described.
<< Result display production >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the "result display effect", the game is mainly performed when the final change of the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold generated during the specific game state disappears. It is a production performed at the timing when a person recognizes that the "renso" state has ended, and information on how many big hit games have been won in the so-called "renso" state and how many game balls in total. It is a production that notifies the player whether or not it has been acquired (corresponding to the display of the number of acquired balls).

(A time reduction, B time reduction, C time reduction)
The execution trigger of the "electric chew support function" is when it is executed after the end of the big hit and when a predetermined number of games (variation of the predetermined number of times) are performed after the RAM is cleared or after the big hit is completed. If you win the specified pattern, there are three. In the following examples, the game state when the electric chew support function is executed after the end of the big hit is set to "A time reduction", and the game is played a predetermined number of times after the RAM is cleared or after the big hit is completed. The game state when the electric chew support function is executed is referred to as "B time reduction", and the game state when the electric chew support function is executed by winning a predetermined time reduction symbol is referred to as "C time reduction". A time reduction, B time reduction, and C time reduction all execute all of the three functions (ordinary symbol probability change, ordinary symbol time reduction, and (ordinary electric accessory) opening extension) that make up the electric chew support function. It may be possible to execute at least one, or the function to be executed may be different depending on the type of time saving. For example, A time reduction is to execute three functions of normal symbol probability change, normal symbol time reduction, and open extension (ordinary electric accessory), and B time reduction and C time reduction are normal symbol time reduction, (ordinary electric accessory). ) By configuring to execute the two functions of opening extension, only the A time reduction that is transferred after the end of the big hit can be positioned as a state that is more advantageous to the player than the other B time reduction and C time reduction. In this case, since the normal symbol probability change is not executed in the B time reduction and the C time reduction, it is more difficult to win the normal symbol than the A time reduction.

The types of time reduction, A time reduction, B time reduction, and C time reduction, will be described in detail as follows.

(1) When the A time saving main game symbol (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, it is stopped and displayed after the special game (big hit game) to be executed thereafter is completed. Electric chew support state executed based on the big hit symbol (that is, the electric chew support state triggered by the special symbol of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol that is to execute the special game)

(2) B time reduction condition The electric chew support state (that is, the main game symbol) executed based on the number of lottery times (number of operations) related to the operation of the device becomes a predetermined number of times (hereinafter, the number of operations n). Electric chew support state triggered by the number of operations of

(3) The C time reduction condition device does not operate, and the main game symbol (the "main game symbol" includes the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol) is a combination of a predetermined specific symbol. (Hereinafter, when the time saving symbol is used together as a time saving symbol), the lost symbol (when the lost symbol is used together as the time saving symbol), the small hit symbol (when the small hit symbol is used together as the time saving symbol), and the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. , Electric chew support state executed based on the stop display of the time saving symbol (that is, the electric chew support state triggered by the time saving symbol)

(Time reduction number N)
Next, the time reduction number N will be described. The A time reduction, the B time reduction, and the C time reduction are configured to execute the electric chew support function a predetermined number of times (hereinafter, the time reduction number N) after the electric chew support function is activated. It is preferable that the number of time reductions N in A time reduction, B time reduction, and C time reduction is associated with a predetermined number of times, respectively, but a jackpot symbol (A time reduction, C time reduction) or a time reduction symbol (B time reduction) The number of time reductions N may be different depending on the situation.

The time reduction number N is configured to satisfy the following equation when "big hit probability ML = 1 / P" in a pachinko gaming machine in which the jackpot probability in the high probability state is MH and the jackpot probability in the low probability state is ML. Has been done.
0.4 × P ≦ N ≦ 3.8 × P
For example, when ML = 1/100, the time reduction frequency N is set in the range of 40 times (0.4 × P (100)) to 380 (3.8 × P (100)) times. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine equipped with a setting change function that can change the "set value" for changing the advantage degree of the special symbol lottery (especially the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device, that is, the jackpot probability), all It is desirable to set the time reduction number N so that the set value satisfies this formula, or to satisfy this formula at the set value having the lowest jackpot probability. Further, it is preferable that only one type of time reduction number N is provided for each set value, but a plurality of types of time reduction number N may be provided for each set value.

(Number of operations n)
Next, the operation number n will be described. The number of operations n is the number of operations (number of fluctuations, number of games) of the main game symbol that triggers the operation of the B time reduction.

The number of operations n is configured to satisfy the following equation when "big hit probability ML = 1 / P" in a pachinko gaming machine in which the jackpot probability in the high probability state is MH and the jackpot probability in the low probability state is ML. Has been done.
2.5 × P ≦ n ≦ 3.0 × P
For example, when ML = 1/100, the time reduction number n is set in the range of 250 times (2.5 × P (100)) to 300 (3.0 × P (100)) times. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine equipped with a setting change function that can change the "set value" for changing the advantage degree of the special symbol lottery (especially the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device, that is, the jackpot probability), the number of times is shortened. As in the case of N, it is desirable to set the number of operations n so that all the set values satisfy this equation, or to satisfy this equation at the set value having the lowest jackpot probability. Further, it is preferable that the number of operations n is only one type for each set value, but a plurality of types of number of operations n may be provided for each set value.

The number of operations n is configured so that the addition (count up) is always performed when the jackpot probability of the main game symbol is in the low probability state, and the addition is not performed when the jackpot probability of the main game symbol is in the high probability state. Has been done. That is, if the jackpot probability of the main game symbol is in a low probability state, the number of operations n is configured to be added regardless of whether or not the A time reduction to C is activated. Although an example of addition is shown, the number of operations n may be set and subtracted (countdown) from n.

The timing for satisfying the addition or subtraction of the number of operations n is any of the start of the fluctuation, the end of the fluctuation, and the stop of the fluctuation (when the fixed fluctuation time has elapsed). The period from the end of the fluctuation to the elapse of the fixed fluctuation time (during the fixed fluctuation time) may be a timing that satisfies the conditions for addition or subtraction of the number of operations n. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine (also called type 1 + 1 type parallel type) in which parallel control is performed in which the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be changed at the same time, addition or subtraction of the number of operations n. Assuming that the timing is the start of fluctuation, when the number of operations n is reached, the B time is shortened from the start of fluctuation.

The number of operations n is configured to add or subtract the total number of operations of the two main game symbols in the pachinko gaming machine having two main game symbols. The number of operations n may be configured to be added or subtracted for only one main game symbol (first main game symbol, second main game symbol). Further, the number of operations n may be configured to add or subtract only the number of operations of the first main game symbol whose symbol mainly fluctuates in the low probability low base state.

There are three timings for clearing the measurement (addition or subtraction) of the number of operations n.

(1) When the RAM is cleared due to a setting change

(2) When RAM is cleared

(3) At the time of operation or termination of the condition device Note that (1) and (2) may be specified so as not to be cleared if they are predetermined as a pachinko gaming machine, or a predetermined operation accompanying power-on. It may be a specification that can arbitrarily set the case of clearing and the case of not clearing according to the above. Further, when the number of operations n is reached in the state where the A time reduction and the C time reduction are operating, the state of the time reduction is switched from the A time reduction to the B time reduction and from the C time reduction to the B time reduction, and the operation number n is measured at that time. It is preferable to clear it, but the measurement may be continued without clearing.

Further, the timing for clearing the measurement (addition or subtraction) of the number of operations n is (1) when the RAM is cleared due to the setting change, (2) when the RAM is cleared, and (3) when the condition device is operated or terminated. If it is determined as per, the measurement (addition or subtraction) of the number of operations n will not be cleared at the end of the B time reduction, so that the B time reduction will not be executed again. In other words, the B time reduction will be activated only once after the RAM is cleared or after the condition device is finished operating. In this case, the degree of profit changes depending on the timing at which the player plays the game (the timing before the operation of the B time reduction is activated and the timing after the operation of the B time reduction is completed). In particular, when straddling business days, the number of operation times n changes depending on whether or not the RAM is cleared along with the business on the next day, so that the player who plays first after turning on the power is the gaming machine that he or she plays. If there is no element for determining whether or not the RAM is cleared and the number of fluctuations (number of operations n) on the previous day, there is a possibility of suffering a disadvantage. Specifically, if the business is closed in the situation after the operation of the B time reduction is completed (that is, the situation where the B time reduction is not executed again) and the business is started the next day without clearing the RAM, the business is started. The player who plays the game first later cannot determine the number of fluctuations at the end of business on the previous day and the presence or absence of RAM clear of the gaming machine, so the number of fluctuations (number of operations n) until the B time reduction is activated is not known. Not only that, I don't know if there is a possibility that B time reduction will work in the first place.

For such a problem, when the RAM is cleared, a predetermined notification effect (for example, an effect display device that causes the lamp to emit red light) is executed only when the RAM is cleared after the power is turned on. It is desirable to execute (display an image that can only be displayed in this situation, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize that the RAM of the gaming machine he / she is playing has been cleared when the predetermined effect is executed after the power is turned on, but the predetermined effect is not executed. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the gaming machine to be played by itself has not cleared the RAM, it becomes possible to predict to some extent the number of fluctuations (number of operations n) until the B time reduction is activated. On the contrary, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying that the RAM has not been cleared. Further, these effects may be constantly notified from the time when the power is turned on by a notification means such as an effect display device, or may be notified when a predetermined number of changes have been made since the power was turned on. Alternatively, the notification may be made only when the remaining number of fluctuations (number of operations n) up to the B time reduction is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, or a combination of these plurality of execution triggers may be used. Further, it may or may not be a deterministic notification that the RAM has been cleared (or that the RAM has not been cleared) due to the execution of the predetermined notification effect, or only suggests it. May be.

However, even if it can be determined whether or not the RAM has been cleared by performing the above-mentioned predetermined effect, whether the business of the previous day was closed before the B time reduction was activated, or the previous day after the B time reduction was completed. It cannot be determined whether the business has ended. That is, when the business on the previous day ends in the game state before the B time reduction is activated and the RAM is not cleared, the predetermined notification effect for notifying that the RAM is cleared is not executed (or). , A predetermined notification effect for notifying that the RAM clear has not been performed is executed), the number of fluctuations (operation number n) until the B time reduction is activated is higher than when the RAM clear is executed. It can be said that it is a favorable situation for the player because it means that the time is shortened, but conversely, when the business on the previous day is closed in the game state after the B time reduction is activated and the RAM is not cleared, the RAM is not cleared. In the situation where the predetermined notification effect for notifying that the RAM is cleared is not executed (or the predetermined notification effect for notifying that the RAM is not cleared is executed), the B time reduction is not executed. Not only that, it is not a preferable situation for the player because it gives the player a misunderstanding that the number of operations until the B time is shortened due to the execution of the predetermined notification effect. Therefore, in the gaming state after the B time reduction is completed, some notification indicating that the B time reduction is completed (for example, after the B time reduction is completed, a character that is displayed only after the B time reduction is completed is displayed on the effect display device. , After the end of the B time reduction, the counter that displays the number of fluctuations (the number of operations n) until the B time reduction is activated (can be displayed before the B time reduction is activated) is not displayed, etc.). So, for the player, either after the B time reduction is completed (that is, the situation where the B time reduction is not likely to operate) or before the B time reduction is activated (that is, the situation where the B time reduction may be activated). ), It can be made to recognize.

In summary, by combining "notification that indicates whether RAM clear is executed" and "notification that indicates whether B time reduction has ended", it is possible to prevent the first player after turning on the power from losing money. .. These notifications may be executed only on one side or both. Further, the method is not limited to the one performed when the power is turned on, and for example, a notification indicating that the B time reduction has ended after the end of the B time reduction after the end of the big hit may be performed.

(About time saving operation according to game state)
Next, the operations of the A time reduction, the B time reduction, and the C time reduction for each game state will be described.

[Normal game state: low probability / low base state]
1. If a big hit is won in a normal game state, it is possible to activate the A time reduction after the big hit game is executed.
2. It is possible to operate the B time reduction during the normal game state. It is not necessary to operate the B time reduction.
3. It is possible to operate the C time reduction during the normal gaming state. It is not necessary to operate the C time reduction.

[Specific game state 1: Low probability / High base state (A time reduction)]
1. If a big hit is won during the A time reduction of the specific game state 1, it is possible to operate the A time reduction after the execution of the big hit game.
2. It is possible to operate the B time reduction in preference to the A time reduction during the A time reduction in the specific game state 1. It is not necessary to operate the B time reduction. Further, when the B time reduction is operated with priority given to the A time reduction, the three functions constituting the electric chew support function of the A time reduction are completely prioritized to the three functions constituting the electric chew support function of the B time reduction. Alternatively, the three functions constituting the electric chew support function of the A time reduction may be maintained as they are even in the B time reduction.
3. It is possible to operate the C time reduction in preference to the A time reduction during the A time reduction in the specific game state 1. It is not necessary to operate the C time reduction. Further, when different time reductions overlap and satisfy the execution conditions (that is, in a situation where a plurality of time reductions are suffered), the one with the larger number of remaining time reductions may be preferentially adopted. In the former specification in which the priority of time reduction is determined in advance according to the type of pachinko gaming machine, it is not necessary to compare the advantages of the number of time reductions, and the priority of time reduction can be determined only by comparing the types of time reductions themselves. Therefore, the processing is not complicated and the capacity of the program can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter specification in which the one with the larger number of remaining time reductions is prioritized, it is possible to eliminate the disadvantage to the player such that the number of time reductions during execution is reduced by the newly executed time reduction.

[Specific game state 1: Low probability / High base state (B time reduction)]
1. If a big hit is won during the B time reduction of the specific game state 1, it is possible to operate the A time reduction after the big hit game is executed.
2. It is configured not to operate the B time reduction during the B time reduction of the specific game state 1. As described above, the clear timing of the number of operations n is (1) when the RAM is cleared due to the setting change, (2) when the RAM is cleared, and (3) when the condition device is operated or terminated. Therefore, once the B time reduction is activated, the B time reduction cannot be operated again. That is, after the time reduction number N of the B time reduction is executed, the normal gaming state in the low probability / low base state is set, and in order to start counting the operation number n again, the setting is changed (accompanied by the setting change). There is no choice but to satisfy the clear condition of the number of operations n by executing either (when the RAM is cleared), the RAM is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), or the winning (when the condition device is operated or terminated).
3. It is possible to operate the C time reduction in preference to the B time reduction during the gaming state in which the B time reduction is performed. It is not necessary to operate the C time reduction. Further, if the number of operations of the C time reduction remains after the end of the B time reduction, the C time reduction may be operated. In this case, the three functions constituting the electric chew support function of the B time saving may be completely prioritized to the three functions constituting the electric chew support function of the C time saving, or the B time saving may have. Electric chew support function The three constituent functions may be maintained as they are even in the C time reduction.

[Specific game state 1: Low probability / High base state (C time reduction)]
1. If a big hit is won during the C time reduction of the specific game state 1, it is possible to operate the A time reduction after the big hit game is executed.
2. In the C time reduction of the specific game state 1, it is possible to operate the B time reduction in preference to the C time reduction. It is not necessary to operate the B time reduction. Further, the B time reduction may be activated after the C time reduction is completed. In this case, the three functions constituting the electric chew support function of the C time saving may be completely prioritized to the three functions constituting the electric chew support function of the B time saving, or the C time saving may have. Electric chew support function The three constituent functions may be maintained as they are even in the B time reduction.
3. During the C time reduction of the specific game state 1, it is possible to operate a new C time reduction in preference to the C time reduction. It is not necessary to activate the new C time reduction. Further, a new C time reduction may be activated after the end of the C time reduction. In this case, the three functions constituting the electric chew support function of the running C time reduction may be completely prioritized to the three functions constituting the electric chew support function of the new C time reduction. , The electric chew support function of the running C time reduction may be maintained as it is even in the new C time reduction.

[Specific game state 2: High probability / High base state]
1. If a big hit is won in the specific game state 2, it is possible to activate the A time reduction after the big hit game is executed.
2. It is configured not to operate the B time reduction in the specific game state 2.
3. It is configured not to operate the C time reduction in the specific game state 2.

[Specific game state 3: High probability / low base state]
1. If a big hit is won in the specific game state 3, the A time reduction is activated after the big hit game is executed.
2. It is configured not to operate the B time reduction in the specific game state 3.
3. It is configured not to operate the C time reduction in the specific game state 3.
<How to set the number of time reductions when the time reductions overlap>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a method of setting the time reduction number N when the time reductions overlap will be described.

(1. Type that does not work for new time reduction)
This is a type that does not repeat the number of time reductions when different types of time reductions overlap (ignore type). As shown in FIG. 21 (1), for example, in a state where the A time reduction is operating after the big hit, even if the time reduction symbol, which is the operation condition of the C time reduction, is stopped and displayed at the timing of T1, the new C time reduction is activated. It is configured not to. That is, it means that the A time reduction is maintained even if the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed in the state where the A time reduction is operating. Further, even if the second time reduction symbol, which is the operation condition of the C time reduction, is stopped and displayed at the timing of T3 during the A time reduction, the new C time reduction is configured not to operate. That is, it means that the A time reduction is maintained even if the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed a plurality of times in the state where the A time reduction is operating. Note that FIG. 21 (1) shows an example in which the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed at two timings, and the C time reduction does not operate at any of the timings, and the A time reduction is maintained. Regardless of the stop display of the symbol, the number of times is not limited as long as the C time reduction is not activated during the A time reduction state. Although an example is shown in which the C time reduction is not activated while the A time reduction is operating, the B time reduction may be configured so as not to operate the B time reduction while the A time reduction is operating. It may be configured not to operate the A time reduction while the time reduction is operating, or it may be configured not to operate the C time reduction while the B time reduction is operating, or the C time reduction may be configured. It may be configured not to operate the A time reduction while the C time reduction is operating, or it may be configured not to operate the B time reduction while the C time reduction is operating.

(2, type 1 that activates a new time saving)
This is a type (continuous type) in which the number of time reductions is repeated when the time reductions overlap. As shown in FIG. 21 (2), for example, in a state where the A time reduction is operating after the big hit game, even if the time reduction symbol which is the operation condition of the C time reduction is stopped and displayed at the timing of T1, the new C time reduction is displayed. It is configured not to work. This is because when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of time saving of A time saving and the time saving number of C time saving are compared, and the time saving of the larger time saving number is adopted, so that FIG. 21 (2). In the example of), the C time reduction does not operate and the A time reduction is maintained. On the other hand, when the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of T3 during A time reduction, the number of time reductions of C time reduction is larger than the remaining number of time reductions of A time reduction. It is configured. Then, the C time reduction is configured to end at the timing of T5 at which the symbol variation of the time reduction number N ends. That is, when the operating condition of the C time reduction is satisfied, the time reduction with a large number of remaining time reductions is adopted. In this case, it is not necessary to immediately activate the C time reduction, and after the A time reduction ends at T4, the C time reduction may be operated after the timing of T4. In addition, although the example in which the number of time reductions of A time reduction and C time reduction is compared and the one with the larger number of time reductions is preferentially adopted is shown, it is also possible to compare the number of time reductions of A time reduction and B time reduction. Alternatively, it may be configured to compare the number of time reductions between the B time reduction and the C time reduction.

(3, type 2 that activates a new time reduction)
This is a type (rewriting type) in which the number of time reductions is switched when the time reductions overlap. As shown in FIG. 21 (3), for example, in a state where the A time reduction is operating after the big hit game, when the time reduction symbol which is the operation condition of the C time reduction is stopped and displayed at the timing of T1, it is newly displayed from the timing of T1. It is configured to operate a C time reduction. Then, the C time reduction is configured to end at the timing of T2 at which the symbol variation of the time reduction number N ends. That is, when the operation condition of C time reduction is satisfied, it is configured to switch to the operating time reduction and operate a new time reduction. It should be noted that after the C time reduction is completed, the A time reduction may be executed again from the timing of T2 or later, and the A time reduction may be executed until the timing of T4. Although an example of switching from A time reduction to C time reduction, which is a new time reduction, during the A time reduction state, it may be configured to switch to B time reduction, which is a new time reduction, during the A time reduction state. It may be configured to switch to A time reduction, which is a new time reduction, during the B time reduction state, or it may be configured to switch to C time reduction, which is a new time reduction, during the B time reduction state. It may be configured to switch to the new time reduction A time reduction during the state of C, or may be configured to switch to the new time reduction B time reduction during the state of C time reduction. It should be noted that the individual types of "1, the type that does not operate the new time reduction", "2, the type 1 that operates the new time reduction", and "3, the type 2 that operates the new time reduction" are combined to form A time reduction to C. It may be configured to operate the time reduction, or may be configured not to operate the A time reduction to the C time reduction.

When the number of operations n is reached in the low probability state and the A time reduction or the C time reduction, the B time reduction is configured to newly operate. At this time, the number of time reductions N is set and B time reduction is started. That is, it is configured to operate the new B time reduction by adopting "3. Type 2 for operating the new time reduction".

If the C time reduction operation is in a low probability state and the time reduction (A time reduction to C time reduction) is not operating, it can be operated when the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed, but it is in a high probability state. The time reduction (A time reduction to C time reduction) is operating, the high probability state and the time reduction (A time reduction to C time reduction) are not operating, or the low probability state and the time reduction (A time reduction to C time reduction) are operating. In some cases, the C time reduction is not activated when the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, it is configured to adopt "1. A type that does not operate in a new time reduction". Since the A time reduction involves the operation of the condition device, it is configured to adopt "3. Type 2 for operating a new time reduction".

(Relationship between time reduction and fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the number of time reductions in each time reduction and the variation pattern table to be referred to will be described.

The number of time reductions in B time reduction is set to be larger than the number of time reductions in A time reduction, the number of time reductions in C time reduction is set to a value larger than the number of time reductions in A time reduction, and the number of time reductions in B time reduction is larger than the number of time reductions in C time reduction. Is also set to a large value. When the B time reduction and the C time reduction are set to the time reduction game state (D time reduction) triggered by other than the stop display of the jackpot symbol, the number of time reductions of the D time reduction is set to be larger than the number of time reductions of the A time reduction. It is configured as follows. It should be noted that the D time reduction is not a time-shortening gaming state in which the game ball is activated when the game ball enters the V winning opening of the small hit V type. The number of time reductions in B time reduction may be set to a value smaller than the number of time reductions in A time reduction or the number of time reductions in C time reduction, or the same value may be set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in each time saving will be described. During the operation of the A time reduction, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the limited frequency table A1, the limited frequency table A2, the limited frequency table A3, and the limited frequency table A4. The limited frequency table A1 is a fluctuation pattern table composed of one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns is the shortest table among the limited frequency tables A1 to A4. The limited frequency tables A2 to A4 are fluctuation pattern tables composed of one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns is longer than that of the limited frequency table A1. The limited frequency table A1 <limited frequency table A2 <limited frequency table A3 <limited frequency table A4 may be configured so that the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern becomes longer, or the limited frequency table A1> limited frequency. The average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern may be shortened in the order of table A2> limited frequency table A3> limited frequency table A4. That is, as long as the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of each limited frequency table is configured to be different, it can be applied regardless of how the relationship of each limited frequency table is configured.

As shown in FIG. 22 (1), in the period A1 during the operation of the A time reduction, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the limited frequency table A1. In the period A2 during the operation of the A time reduction, it is configured to select the fluctuation pattern with reference to the limited frequency table A2. In the period A3 during the operation of the A time reduction, it is configured to select the fluctuation pattern with reference to the limited frequency table A3. In the period A4 during the operation of the A time reduction, it is configured to select the fluctuation pattern with reference to the limited frequency table A4.

Next, the game state of the D time reduction will be described. The number of time reductions (period) of D time reduction is set to be larger (the period is set longer) than the number of time reductions (period) of A time reduction. Then, each period D1 to D4 during the D time reduction may be configured to have a longer period than each period A1 to A4 of the A time reduction. Moreover, a part of the period may be composed of the period of the same length. For example, the period A1 and the period D1, the period A3 and the period D3, and the period A4 and the period D4 are configured to have the same length, and only the period A2 and the period D2 are configured to have different lengths. The period for introducing the time reduction (period A1, period D1) and the period at the end of the time reduction (period A3, period A4, period D3, period D4) are set to the same length period, and the other intermediate periods (period A2) are set. By setting the period D2) to a period of a different length, the production frequency between the period for introducing the time reduction and the period at the end of the period can be made common between the A time reduction and the D time reduction, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. You can start and end a time-saving game. Further, by changing the length of the period (period A2, period D2) in the middle, the effect frequency of the introduction period and the final period is not affected. As long as the reference order of the limited frequency table (for example, the order of A1, A2, A3, A4) is the same, the length of any period (number of games) may be changed. For example, by configuring the period D1 to be longer than the period A1, an explanatory effect to the player during the period of introduction of the D time reduction (for example, the above-mentioned B time reduction operation start effect, C time reduction operation start effect, selection menu display). It can be done carefully by configuring the time spent on the production) for a long time.

As for the limited frequency table to be referred to, as shown in FIG. 22 (2), in the period D1 during the operation of the D time reduction, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the limited frequency table A1. In the operating period D2 of the D time reduction, it is configured to select the variation pattern with reference to the limited frequency table A2. In the operating period D3 of the D time reduction, it is configured to select the variation pattern with reference to the limited frequency table A3. In the operating period D4 of the D time reduction, it is configured to select the variation pattern with reference to the limited frequency table A4. That is, in FIG. 22 (2), the limited frequency table referred to by the D time saving is configured to refer to the same limited frequency table as the A time saving in the same order. By configuring in this way, since the limited frequency table common to the A time reduction and the D time reduction is used, the program capacity can be reduced and the program can be simplified.

Of the D time reductions, for example, in the B time reduction, the variation pattern may be selected by referring to the limited frequency table B1, the limited frequency table B2, the limited frequency table B3, the limited frequency table B4, and the like. The limited frequency table B1 is a fluctuation pattern table composed of one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns is the shortest table among the limited frequency tables B1 to B4. The limited frequency tables B2 to B4 are fluctuation pattern tables composed of one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns is longer than that of the limited frequency table B1. The limited frequency table B1 <limited frequency table B2 <limited frequency table B3 <limited frequency table B4 may be configured so that the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern becomes longer, or the limited frequency table B1> limited frequency. The average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern may be shortened in the order of table B2> limited frequency table B3> limited frequency table B4. It is sufficient that the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of each limited frequency table is different.

Further, among the D time reductions, for example, in the C time reduction, the variation pattern may be selected by referring to the limited frequency table C1, the limited frequency table C2, the limited frequency table C3, the limited frequency table C4, and the like. The limited frequency table C1 is a fluctuation pattern table composed of one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns is the shortest table among C1 to C4. The limited frequency tables C2 to C4 are fluctuation pattern tables composed of one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns is longer than that of the limited frequency table C1. The limited frequency table C1 <limited frequency table C2 <limited frequency table C3 <limited frequency table C4 may be configured so that the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern becomes longer, or the limited frequency table C1> limited frequency. The average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern may be shortened in the order of table C2> limited frequency table C3> limited frequency table C4, or the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of each limited frequency table may be different. It suffices if it is configured. The limited frequency table B1, the limited frequency table B2, the limited frequency table B3, and the limited frequency table B4 are used as the limited frequency table dedicated to the B time reduction, and the limited frequency table C1, the limited frequency table C2, the limited frequency table C3, and the limited frequency table C4. May be used as a limited frequency table dedicated to C time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), in the period D1 during the operation of the D time reduction, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the limited frequency tables B1 and C1, and the period during the operation of the D time reduction is performed. In D2, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the limited frequency tables B2 and C2, and in the operating period D3 of the D time reduction, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the limited frequency tables B3 and C3. In the period D4 during the operation of the D time reduction, the variation pattern may be selected with reference to the limited frequency tables B4 and C4. That is, the limited frequency table referred to by the D time saving may be configured to refer to the limited frequency table which is completely different from the A time saving. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the effect using different fluctuation times for the A time reduction and the D time reduction, so that the effect according to the roles of the A time reduction and the D time reduction can be executed during each time reduction. The period D1 and the period A1, the period D3 and the period A3, the period D4 and the period A4 are configured to have the same length, and the period D2 and the period A2 are configured to have different lengths. However, it does not have to be configured in this way. Each period may be a predetermined period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (4), in the period D1 during the operation of the D time reduction, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the limited frequency table A1, and in the operation period D2 of the D time reduction. Is configured to refer to the limited frequency tables B2 and C2 to select the variation pattern, and is configured to refer to the limited frequency table A3 to select the variation pattern during the operating period D3 of the D time reduction. In the period D3 during the operation of the D time reduction, the variation pattern may be selected with reference to the limited frequency table A3. That is, the limited frequency table referred to by the D time saving may be configured to refer to the limited frequency table having a part of the same as the A time saving. By configuring in this way, since a part of the limited frequency table is used for A time reduction and D time reduction, the program capacity can be reduced, the program can be simplified, and a part of the period can be shortened. (For example, for the period D2, which has a relatively long period), the effect can be executed by using different fluctuation times for the A time reduction and the D time reduction. Can be done inside. The period D1 and the period A1, the period D3 and the period A3, the period D4 and the period A4 are configured to have the same length, and the period D2 and the period A2 are configured to have different lengths. However, it does not have to be configured in this way. Each period may be a predetermined period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (5), during the operating period of the D time reduction, the limited frequency table A1 in which the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is the shortest of the limited frequency tables A1 to A4 is used. It is configured to refer to and select a variation pattern. With this configuration, the fluctuation time of B time reduction can be shortened most easily and rationally, and if the player gets tired of the game without getting a big hit in the middle of the game, D time reduction By performing a larger number of time-saving games using the short fluctuation time, it is possible to provide the player with a big hit in a timely manner. In addition, instead of the limited frequency table A1, the limited frequency table having the longest average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern among the limited frequency tables A1 to A4 may be used.

Further, it is preferable that the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern used in the D time reduction is set shorter than the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern used in the A time reduction. The average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the A time reduction is set shorter than the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the normal gaming state. That is, with respect to the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time is more likely to be selected during the operation of the D time reduction than during the operation of the A time reduction. Then, when the number of operations n becomes 0 (in the case of the subtraction method) and the gaming state has a short B time, it is possible to provide the player with a big hit at an earlier stage by using the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time. You can do it.

With this configuration, the A time reduction set after the execution of the big hit game retains the afterglow of the big hit game, and a certain number of A time reduction games are used using a fluctuation time relatively shorter than the normal game state. By executing, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit consecutive villa, and if the player is tired of the game without becoming a big hit in the middle of the game in C time reduction or B time reduction, A By executing the time-saving game more times than the A time-saving using the fluctuation time shorter than the time-saving, it is possible to provide the player with a big hit in a timely manner.

Further, the total time of each action in one symbol change in A time reduction is longer than the total time of each action in one symbol change in D time reduction. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay close attention to each action during the A time saving, which is the period during which the player can expect the big hit consecutive villa. In addition, the execution time of one action (action at the start of fluctuation, fixed position action, shaking action, tempai action, decision action) is A time shorter than the execution time of one action in one symbol change in D time reduction. Since the execution time of one action in one symbol change in is configured to be longer, one player can expect a big hit consecutive villa in A time reduction, which is a period in which the player can be expected. It has the effect of allowing you to watch the action.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to in each time saving will be described.

FIG. 23 (1) is a timing chart in which (1) and (2) of FIG. 22 are combined. The time is reduced to A after the execution of the jackpot game A, which is executed after the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, and the limited frequency tables A1 to A4 are used as the limited frequency table during the A time reduction. When the A time saving operation is completed and the normal game state is reached, the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the normal game state table. Further, in the period B0 of the normal gaming state (for example, the period from 10 fluctuations before the B time reduction is activated to the operation of the B time reduction), the limited frequency table A3 (not limited to the limited frequency table A3 but another limited frequency table). (It may be It is configured to perform the production, etc.). The limited frequency table A3 is determined to be referred to in the period B0 based on the jackpot symbol A that triggered the execution of the jackpot game A. Then, the limited frequency table A1 is referred to in the period B1 during the B time reduction, the limited frequency table A2 is referred to in the period B2, the limited frequency table A3 is referred to in the period B3, and the limited frequency table A4 is referred to in the period B4. These limited frequency tables A1 to A4 are determined to be referred to in the periods B1 to B4 based on the jackpot symbol A that triggered the execution of the jackpot game A.

FIG. 23 (2) is a timing chart in which (1) and (3) of FIG. 22 are combined. The time is reduced to A after the execution of the jackpot game A, which is executed after the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, and the limited frequency tables A1 to A4 are used as the limited frequency table during the A time reduction. When the operation of the A time reduction is completed and the normal game state is reached, the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the normal game state table. Further, in the period B0 of the normal gaming state (for example, the period from 10 fluctuations before the B time reduction is activated to the operation of the B time reduction), the limited frequency table B3 (not limited to the limited frequency table B3 but other limited frequency tables). (It may be) to display a countdown such as "10", "9", "8" ... "0" for the remaining number of fluctuations until the B time reduction operation. It is configured to perform the production, etc.). The limited frequency table B3 is determined to be referred to in the period B0 based on the jackpot symbol A that triggered the execution of the jackpot game A. Then, the limited frequency table B1 is referred to in the period B1 during the B time reduction, the limited frequency table B2 is referred to in the period B2, the limited frequency table B3 is referred to in the period B3, and the limited frequency table B4 is referred to in the period B4. These limited frequency tables B1 to B4 are determined to be referred to in the periods B1 to B4 based on the jackpot symbol A that triggered the execution of the jackpot game A.

FIG. 23 (3) is a timing chart in which (1) and (4) of FIG. 22 are combined. The time is reduced to A after the execution of the jackpot game A, which is executed after the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, and the limited frequency tables A1 to A4 are used as the limited frequency table during the A time reduction. When the operation of the A time reduction is completed and the normal game state is reached, the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the normal game state table. Further, in the period B0 of the normal gaming state (for example, the period from 10 fluctuations before the B time reduction is activated to the operation of the B time reduction), the limited frequency table A3 (not limited to the limited frequency table A3 but another limited frequency table). (It may be It is configured to perform the production, etc.). The limited frequency table A3 is determined to be referred to in the period B0 based on the jackpot symbol A that triggered the execution of the jackpot game A. Then, the limited frequency table A1 is referred to in the period B1 during the B time reduction, the limited frequency table B2 is referred to in the period B2, the limited frequency table A3 is referred to in the period B3, and the limited frequency table A4 is referred to in the period B4. These limited frequency tables A1, B2, A3, and A4 are determined to be referred to in the periods B1 to B4 based on the jackpot symbol A that triggered the execution of the jackpot game A.

FIG. 23 (4) is a timing chart showing after the RAM clear is executed. The gaming state after the execution of RAM clear is the normal gaming state, and is configured to determine the variation pattern with reference to the normal gaming state table. When the number of operations n becomes 0 (in the case of the subtraction method), the B time reduction is activated, and during this B time reduction, the limited frequency table described in (1) to (3) above is referred to or predetermined. It is configured to refer to only one limited frequency table (for example, one limited frequency table among the limited frequency tables A1 to A4 and the limited frequency tables B1 to B4, or another limited frequency table). ing. In the period from the execution of the RAM clear to the operation of the B time reduction, the specific symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol), which is a condition for the limited frequency state, is not stopped and displayed before that, and the RAM is cleared. Only the player who played the game for the first time after clearing the RAM of the pachinko gaming machine will be in a state where the execution time is more advantageous for the player than the normal time (the fluctuation efficiency is better than the normal time). It is not desirable to refer to a specific variation pattern table, the limited frequency table, after performing a RAM clear, as there is a concern that the game will be unfair so that it can start from a favorable state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23 (4), it is suitable for the pachinko gaming machine of this example to be configured so that the limited frequency table is not referred to during the period from the execution of the RAM clear to the operation of the B time reduction. In the period B0, which is the period before the B time reduction operation of such a pachinko gaming machine, the countdown effect as the B time reduction operation start fanning effect cannot be executed using the limited frequency table. However, for example, if the number of symbol fluctuations is counted by the sub-control unit, even after the RAM is cleared, the B time reduction operation start fanning effect (for example, the remaining number of fluctuations up to the B time reduction is set to "10", " 9 ”,“ 8 ”…“ 0 ”, etc.) can be executed without using the limited frequency table.

[First Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technique. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite techniques will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technique will be described with the same reference numerals.

The first embodiment is a "V probability variation (ball probability)" type gaming machine specification, and the basic structure of the board surface will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 24 is a game flow relating to the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment. The normal game state is a low probability / low base state, and by winning a big hit with a probability of 1/256 in the lottery related to the first special symbol performed by entering the first start winning device P710. It shifts to the jackpot game state.

There are two types of jackpot game states that are won by the lottery related to the first special symbol, and if the "fastest bonus" is won, the electric chew support function is activated 64 times after the jackpot game of 3 rounds is executed. Move to "fastest rush" (high probability / high base state). On the other hand, if the "Struggle Bonus" is won, after the big hit game of 3 rounds is executed, the game shifts to the "Struggle Mode" (low probability / high base state) in which the electric chew support function is activated 100 times or 200 times. do. In the lottery related to the first special symbol, when a big hit is made, the ratio of "fastest bonus" is 5%, and the ratio of "struggle bonus" is 95%.

The "fastest rush" is a big hit with a probability of 1 / 25.6 in the lottery related to the second special symbol performed by entering the second start winning device P720 while the electric chew support function is activated 64 times. It will be a game that aims to win the prize.

During the "fastest rush", there are two types of jackpot game states that are won by lottery related to the second special symbol. If the "DH bonus" is won, the jackpot of 2 rounds (25%) and the jackpot of 3 rounds (20) %) Of the three types of jackpot states of 4 rounds of jackpots (30%), one of the jackpots according to the probability is executed, and then the game shifts to the "fastest rush" again. On the other hand, if the "DH Bonus MAX" is won, after 10 rounds of big hits (25%) are executed, the game shifts to the "fastest rush" again. In the lottery related to the second special symbol, regardless of whether the "DH bonus" or the "DH bonus MAX" is won, the probability is always high after the big hit.

In the "fastest rush", if the fluctuation of 60 times is completed without winning the big hit while the electric chew support function of 60 times is activated, the process shifts to "END battle". In "END Battle", the effect of inciting whether or not to make a big hit with the remaining 4 fluctuations is performed, so the fluctuation time of one time is relative compared to the "fastest rush" in the same high probability / high base state. It is configured to be long. Further, in the last one fluctuation, the result screen for displaying the total number of game balls acquired so far, the number of consecutive villas, etc. may be displayed. In that case, the last one fluctuation may be displayed. If there are variations in the fluctuation time due to fluctuations, there is a concern that the player will not be able to clearly inform the player of the game results so far (that is, if a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected in the last one, the result screen. (The display time will be shortened). Therefore, for example, it is preferable to have about one type of variation pattern in each of the case of a big hit and the case of a loss.

In "END Battle", if you win a big hit while the electric chew support function is activated 4 times, you will move to "Fastest Rush" again, but 4 fluctuations have ended without winning a big hit. In some cases, the transition to the "normal state" ends a series of favorable states.

Next, the "fight mode" is 1/256 in the lottery related to the second special symbol performed by entering the second start winning device P710 while the electric chew support function is activated 100 times or 200 times. It will be a game that aims to win a big hit with the probability of.

If you win a big hit while the electric chew support function is activated 100 times or 200 times in "fight mode", 2 rounds of big hits (25%), 3 rounds of big hits (20%), 4 rounds Of the four types of jackpots (30%) and 10 rounds of jackpots (25%), one of the jackpots according to the probability is executed. After the "awakening bonus" is executed, the game shifts to the "fastest rush". do. That is, the "awakening bonus (2R, 3R, 4R, 10R)" and the "DH bonus (2R, 3R, 4R)" or "DH bonus MAX (10R)" are both lottery related to the second special symbol. It is a big hit state to win. On the other hand, in the "fight mode", if the jackpot is not won while the electric chew support function is activated 100 times or 200 times, the normal state is entered.

Since the first embodiment is a "V probability variation (ball probability)" type gaming machine specification, any of the "fastest bonus", "DH bonus", "DH bonus MAX", and "awakening bonus" bonuses can be used. In the second round, it is a condition that the game ball is passed through the specific area P750 provided in the big winning opening P751 (“V winning”) to have a high probability after the big hit is completed. If the game ball cannot be passed through the specific area P750 provided in the large winning opening P751 (“V winning”) in the second round, the “fastest bonus”, “DH bonus”, and “DH bonus” Even if it is "MAX" or "Awakening Bonus", it will shift to a low probability after the big hit.

Here, in the "fight mode", in the state where the electric chew support function is activated 200 times, when the 200 times are completed without a big hit, the electric chew support function is further activated 560 times in the "awakening mode". ”(Low probability / high base state). This is actually a state in which the electric chew support function is activated 100 times (“struggle mode”) and a state in which the electric chew support function is activated 200 times (“struggle mode”) as types of “struggle bonus”. ) And the state where the electric chew support function is activated 760 times ("fight mode" + "awakening mode"), and there is a big hit with three types of electric chew support functions, of which the electric chew support function is 760 times. When it becomes a big hit that operates, it is only directed by dividing it into "struggle mode (200 times)" and "awakening mode (560 times)".

In the "fight mode", the electric chew support function may end in 100 times, 200 times, or 760 times, so the 100th change after the electric chew support function is activated. In the 200th fluctuation after the electric chew support function is activated and the 760th fluctuation after the electric chew support function is activated, the effect of inciting whether the electric chew support function is terminated or continued is performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the favorable state will continue. Such a fanning effect may be performed not only in the final variation at the end of the electric chew support function, but also in a plurality of variations from the variation before the final variation to the final variation. Further, the same fanning effect may be performed for all the fluctuations of 100 times, 200 times, and 760 times, which are the timings at which the electric chew support function ends, or different fanning effects may be performed. In addition, the number of fluctuations in which the fanning effect is performed may be different.

Next, a case where the big hit is not won while the electric chew support function is activated 560 times in the "awakening mode" will be described. More specifically, in the lottery (1/256) related to the first special symbol performed by entering the first start winning device P710 in the normal state, the big hit in which the electric chew support function is activated 760 times. In the lottery (1/256) related to the second special symbol performed by entering the second starting prize device P720 while the electric chew support function performed 760 times after the winning and the end of the big hit is activated. This is the situation when the jackpot is not won even once.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment, if the fluctuation is performed 760 times without winning the big hit in a low probability state after the big hit is completed (or after the RAM is cleared), the B time is shortened by 900 times. Is now working. Since the jackpot probability ML of the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment is 1/256 (P), the number of operations of the B time reduction n = 760 times is “2.5 × P (2.5 × 256 = 640 times) ≦. The equation of "n (760 times) ≤ 3.0 x P (3.0 x 256 = 768 times)" is satisfied, and similarly, the number of time reductions of B time reduction N = 900 times is "0.4 (0.4 times)". × 256 ≈ 102 times) × P ≦ N (900 times) ≦ 3.8 × P (3.8 × 256 = 973 times) ”is satisfied.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the relationship between the normal game (low probability / low base medium) and the time saving of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and 760 times of electricity in the “struggle mode” + “awakening mode”. It is an image diagram which shows the state when the fluctuation of 760 times is completed without winning a big hit while the chew support function is activated.

In FIG. 25 (1), after the A time reduction (low probability / high base state “fight mode” + “awakening mode”) is completed at 760 times, the B time reduction of 900 times from the 761st time of the next fluctuation is activated. Shows the pattern. With this configuration, A time reduction and B time reduction can be operated continuously, so that a situation is created in which the electric chew support function of 1560 times (760 times + 900 times) is substantially operated continuously. be able to. Further, since the normal state is not performed between the end of the A time reduction and the start of the B time reduction, the pattern is such that a disadvantageous situation does not occur in terms of ball ejection.

FIG. 25 (2) shows from the 761st time after the A time reduction (low probability / high base state “struggle mode” + “awakening mode”) is completed in 752 times and then the normal state is executed 8 times. The pattern which activates the B time reduction of 900 times is shown. Further, FIG. 25 (3) shows 761 after the A time reduction (low probability / high base state “fight mode” + “awakening mode”) is completed in 756 times and then the normal state is executed four more times. The pattern which activates the B time reduction of 900 times from the first time is shown.

In the patterns of FIGS. 25 (2) and 25 (3), the B time reduction is operated after a certain number of normal fluctuations are inserted after the A time reduction is completed. In this way, the B time reduction is started from the end of the A time reduction. By intentionally performing the normal state until the start of the operation, it is possible to make the player more clearly aware of the start timing of the B time reduction. In the pattern of FIG. 25 (1), since the A time reduction and the B time reduction are continuously executed, there is a concern that the switching timing between the A time reduction and the B time reduction becomes difficult to understand. However, FIGS. 25 (2) and 25 (3). Then, such a concern can be solved by sandwiching the normal state where the electric chew support function does not operate.

However, if the number of executions in the normal state from the end of the A time reduction to the start of the B time reduction is designed to be large in the dark clouds, the continuity between the A time reduction and the B time reduction will be weakened, and the disadvantage to the player will be large. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 25 (2), the maximum number of special figure 1 hold (4 pieces) and the maximum number of special figure 2 hold are as the number of fluctuations in the normal state executed from the end of the A time reduction to the start of the B time reduction. By setting it to 8 times or less, which is the total number of the number (4 pieces), if the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are held up to the maximum number, the normal fluctuation of 8 times It becomes possible to operate the B time reduction without entering the ball into the new starting port. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the electric chew support function does not operate due to the normal state while sandwiching the normal state between the start of the A time reduction and the end of the B time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (3), the number of fluctuations in the normal state executed from the end of the A time reduction to the start of the B time reduction is set to 4 times or less, which is the maximum number (4) of the special figure 2 hold. By doing so, if the special figure 2 hold is held up to the maximum number of 4 at the end of the A time reduction, it becomes possible to survive the 4 normal states by the fluctuation of the special figure 2 hold. There is. With this configuration, the lottery related to the first special symbol performed by entering the first start winning device P710 in the normal state from the end of the A time reduction to the start of the B time reduction is prevented. be able to. Specifically, the lottery related to the first special symbol performed by entering the first starting winning device P710 and the lottery relating to the second special symbol performed by entering the second starting winning device P720 are big hits. Since the rate of high probability is higher in the lottery related to the 2nd special symbol (when the lottery related to the 1st special symbol is a big hit, the rate of high probability after the big hit is 5%, If a big hit is made in the lottery related to the 2nd special symbol, the percentage of high probability after the big hit is 100%), by any chance, the 1st special symbol is related to the normal state from the end of the A time reduction to the start of the B time reduction. If the lottery is won, the disadvantage to the player will be enormous. Therefore, the pattern of FIG. 25 (3), which can survive the normal state by the lottery related to the second special symbol by holding the special figure 2, is more effective than the pattern of FIG. 25 (2).

The patterns in FIGS. 25 (2) and 25 (3) assume the maximum number of special figure 1 hold (4 pieces) and the maximum number of special figure 2 hold (4 pieces). 2 It can be changed as appropriate according to the maximum number of holds. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine designed so that the maximum number of special figure 1 hold is 3 and the maximum number of special figure 2 hold is 2, in the pattern of FIG. 25 (2), the number of times in the normal state is 5. The number of times may be set to 2 or less, and in the pattern of FIG. 25 (3), the number of times in the normal state may be set to 2 or less. That is, the number of executions of A time reduction is "P", the maximum number of holds (the maximum number of special figure 1 hold, or the maximum number of special figure 2 hold, or the maximum number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold. When the number of fluctuations (number of operations n) until the B time reduction is executed is "M", the number of "P" is "(MN) ≤ P". It can be appropriately selected as long as the relationship of "≦ M" is satisfied.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment, the period in which the electric chew support function is activated is 64 times high probability / high base state (“fastest rush”) and 100 times low probability / high. Base state ("Struggle mode"), 200 low probability / high base state ("Struggle mode"), 760 low probability / high base state ("Struggle mode" + "Awakening mode"), 900 low It has a probability / high base state (B time reduction), and the jackpot expectation in each state is as follows.

(1) 164 times high probability / high base state ("fastest rush")
Probability of winning 1 / 5.6 in 64 times = 92.19%

(2) 100 times low probability / high base state ("fight mode")
Probability of winning 1/256 in 100 times = 32.39%

(3) 200 times low probability / high base state ("fight mode")
Probability of winning 1/256 in 200 times = 54.29%

(4) 760 times low probability / high base state ("fight mode" + "awakening mode")
Probability of winning 1/256 in 760 times = 94.89%

(5) 900 times low probability / high base state (B time reduction)
Probability of winning 1/256 in 900 times = 97.05%
The relationship between the number of times the electric chew support is operated for each state is as follows.

(5)>(4)>(3)>(1)> (2)
The relationship between the jackpot expectations for each state is as follows.

(5)>(4)>(1)>(3)> (2)
That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment, the highest expectation of a big hit is during 900 B time reductions, which is executed by performing 760 fluctuations without winning a big hit even once in a normal state. By making it higher, it is designed to be more positioned as a time saving to relieve the fitting state where the jackpot is not won over a long number of fluctuations. In addition, the jackpot expectation in the "fight mode" + "awakening mode" in the low probability / high base state is designed to be higher than the jackpot expectation in the "fastest rush" in the high probability / high base state, that is, high after the jackpot. Even if the probability is low (fighting mode) instead of the probability (“fastest rush”), the game state (“fighting mode” + “awakening mode”) has a higher expectation of a big hit than the high probability (“fastest rush”). By providing "), the demerit related to the playability of the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment, which is unlikely to be highly probable from the lottery related to the first special symbol performed by entering the first starting winning device P710, is alleviated. Can be made to.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment, the game property using the A time reduction and the B time reduction has been described, but the game property may be a game property in which the C time reduction is added to the game property. For example, in the normal state, it is configured to win the normal symbol at 1/100, and when the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory can easily enter the second start winning device. The lottery for the 2nd special symbol can be performed 5 times in total, "1 change due to entering the 2nd start winning device + 4 changes in the maximum number of holdings for the 2nd special symbol". Configure to. Further, only in the lottery related to the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol in which the C time-saving in which the electric chew support function is activated six times is executed is configured to be won with a probability of 1/10. As a result, by winning a normal symbol that operates with a probability of 1/100 in normal times, it is possible to receive a lottery related to the second special symbol five times, and in these five lottery, a 1/10 time saving symbol is won. In that case, the electric chew support function is activated 6 times, and 10 times ("6 fluctuations due to the entry into the 2nd start winning device + 4 of the maximum number of holdings related to the 2nd special symbol". It is a game that allows you to receive a lottery related to the second special symbol of "variation for each piece"). In addition, if any one of the 10 fluctuations related to the 2nd special symbol is won, the time saving symbol of 1/10 can be won again, so that the lottery related to the 2nd special symbol can be received again. It is possible to wait for a big hit of 1/319 while looping an advantageous state in which the support function is activated and the lottery related to the second special symbol can be received. As a result, in the normal state, not only the jackpot with a probability of 1/319 but also the expectation for the time-saving symbol that wins with a higher probability of 1/100 is created. If you win the time saving symbol during the "fastest rush" or "END battle" that is A time saving, you should continue the running "fastest rush" or "END battle" without activating C time saving. desirable. In addition, after the end of "END Battle", in the fluctuation in the hold (maximum 4 pieces) related to the 2nd special symbol, if the time saving symbol with a probability of 1/10 is won, 6 times of C time saving will be activated, which is advantageous. Relief playability is also created, such as the expectation of shortening the C time in the remaining hold after the end of such a state.

Next, the effect from the normal state to the operation of the B time reduction will be described.

26 to 28 are image diagrams showing how the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol increases as the remaining number of fluctuations up to the number of fluctuations in which the B time reduction operates decreases, as an example of the effect suggesting the operation of the B time reduction in the normal state. Is.

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram 1 of the effect (1) suggesting the operation of the time saving during the normal game (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is the “time saving” in the upper left of the effect display device. By displaying "346 times remaining until activation", the player is notified of the remaining number of fluctuations until the B time reduction is activated. Specifically, since the number of operations n = 760 times until the B time reduction in the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment is activated, FIG. 26 shows the effect in the 414th variation from the end of the big hit (or after the RAM is cleared). Will be.

FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram 2 of the effect (1) suggesting the operation of the time saving during the normal game (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is the “time saving” in the upper left of the effect display device. "50 times remaining until activation" is displayed, and it seems that the 720th change has been performed since the end of the big hit (or after clearing the RAM), and the character image P902 on the back side of the central decorative pattern P801. This shows that the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol P801 is increasing. In other words, by increasing the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol in one fluctuation from the fluctuation that the remaining number of times until the B time reduction is activated is less than 50 times, it is possible to experience the approaching operation of the B time reduction. The production is made so that people can understand it. At this time, the variation pattern of the special figure performed based on the ball entering the first start winning opening P711 on the main control board P40 has not changed, and only the variation of the decorative symbol as an effect is configured to be faster. ing. As a method of increasing the fluctuation speed of the decorative pattern, it is sufficient to display the fluctuation speed quickly, and in addition, by performing temporary fluctuation + temporary stop multiple times, the target B time reduction is approached. It is also possible to express the state of being more visually. In addition, the example in which the fluctuation pattern of the special figure does not change has been described, but the variation time itself of the fluctuation pattern of the special map is shortened by referring to the special fluctuation pattern table using the limited frequency (pattern table). By doing so, you can also fuel a more realistic sense of urgency.

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram 3 of the effect (1) suggesting the operation of the time saving during the normal game (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is the “time saving” in the upper left of the effect display device. The message "Remaining until activation? Times" is displayed, and it seems that it is not possible to determine how many fluctuations have been made since the end of the big hit (or after clearing the RAM), and the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol P801 has increased. It shows how it is doing. In FIG. 28, the remaining number of times until the B time reduction is activated is not clearly notified, but as in FIG. 27, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol P801 is increased according to the remaining number of times until the B time reduction is activated. , The player can visually recognize the remaining number of times until the B time reduction. That is, the player can enjoy playing the game while predicting the remaining number of times until the B time reduction is activated according to the speed of change of the decorative symbol P801. In this case, it is possible not to display "remaining until the time reduction is activated? Times" on the upper left of the effect display device. Further, the clear remaining number of times may be notified when the remaining number of times until the B time reduction is activated is less than five times. Further, the character image P902 of FIG. 27 may or may not be displayed at the timing when the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol P801 increases.

Next, FIGS. 29 to 31 show, as an example of the effect suggesting the operation of the B time reduction in the normal state, when the reach is established when the remaining number of times until the fluctuation number of the B time reduction is small is small, a big hit or B It is an image diagram showing a state of performing an effect showing one of the results of reaching the number of fluctuations in which the time reduction is activated.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram 1 of the effect (2) suggesting a time-saving operation during normal gaming (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is a character during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol P801. The image P902 displays the message "If it becomes a reach, it may be a chance !?", indicating that the establishment of the reach by the decorative symbol P801 is a chance for the player. Similar to FIG. 27, the situation of FIG. 29 is a fluctuation of the remaining 50 times until the B time reduction is activated, and unlike FIG. 27, the remaining number of times until the B time reduction is not clearly notified. That is, it is difficult for the player to clearly determine the remaining number of times until the B time is shortened.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram 2 of the effect (2) suggesting a time-saving operation during normal gaming (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is the “8” symbol and “B”. It shows that the two symbols with the symbol are reach (double tempai). Here, the "8" symbol plays a role in the staging that suggests that if all three are aligned, it will be one of the big hits. It plays a staging role that suggests that it should be done. The type of decorative pattern is not limited to this. In particular, regarding the "B" symbol, the role is different from that of the jackpot, and even if three "B" symbols are aligned ("BBB"), the jackpot does not execute only by operating the B time reduction, so "B" There is a risk of misunderstanding that the player expects some kind of big hit when all three symbols are aligned. In this case, for example, the operation of shortening the B time may be suggested by a special display mode without adopting the display mode of doublet. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a disjointed symbol combination such as "ZTN" or to incorporate a special symbol into one of the symbol combinations such as "6 ★ 6". .. In the specific examples using FIGS. 29 to 31, for convenience, the symbol combination of "BBB" will be described as a symbol combination suggesting that the B time reduction is activated.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram 3 of the effect (2) suggesting a time-saving operation during normal gaming (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is a combination of symbols of “888” and “88”. It is shown that the symbol combination of "BBB" is in battle, and it is shown that the fluctuation is determined to be either symbol combination as a result of the battle. At this time, since the simplified drawing P802 displayed on the upper right is variablely displayed in the reach state, the main decorative symbol P801 is displayed in a state where the three symbols are aligned, but in reality, it is displayed in the reach state. It turns out that it is changing. In FIG. 31, one of the symbol combination of "888" and the symbol combination of "BBB" is definitely displayed by the subsequent effect, and in the case of the symbol combination of "888", it is a big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the symbol combination of "BBB", the B time reduction is notified from the next fluctuation. That is, in the game after a specific number of times (in this example, the remaining 50 times until the B time reduction is activated), it is set as a special game state for staging, and in this period, if it is a hit, the hit is set. It is easy to select an effect that definitively suggests, and as a result, it is easy to perform an effect that definitively suggests a hit during this period.

In this way, in a situation where the remaining number of times until the B time reduction is not clearly notified, by providing a special game state in which the big hit or the operation of the B time reduction is confirmed when the reach of the decorative symbol is established, " It is possible to provide the player with fun other than "reach establishment = big hit".

Further, in the image diagrams of FIGS. 29 to 31, no effect suggesting that the game is in a special gaming state (“reach establishment = big hit or B time reduction”) is not performed, but for example, up to the number of fluctuations in which the B time reduction is activated. The current fluctuation is a special gaming state by continuously displaying the notation such as "chance zone" from the time when the remaining number of fluctuations of is 50 to the final fluctuation when the B time reduction is activated. The player may be notified of this. Further, although an example in which a big hit or a B time reduction result is obtained by establishing a reach has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and a situation that results in a C time reduction may be selectively combined.

Next, FIGS. 32 and 33 show, as an example of the effect suggesting the operation of the B time reduction in the normal state, the effect of suggesting the remaining number of times until the number of fluctuations in which the B time reduction is operated is ex post facto at a predetermined opportunity. It is an image diagram showing the situation.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram 1 of an effect (3) suggesting a time-saving operation during normal gaming (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is B by the gauge display at the lower right. It shows how to suggest the remaining number of fluctuations until the time reduction is activated to about. The situation in FIG. 32 is the 600th fluctuation after the end of the big hit (or after clearing the RAM), and the B time reduction is activated with the remaining 160 times, but only 50% of the gauge is displayed in the lower right gauge display. Is not accumulated, so that the player is given an impression that is less than the remaining number of fluctuations until the actual B time reduction.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram 2 of the effect (3) suggesting a time-saving operation during normal gaming (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and the central decorative symbol P801 is in the reach state. It is displayed as a stop with a combination of symbols that are out of the range, and the display of "gauge UP" is displayed at the bottom, indicating that the gauge display at the lower right is increased from 50% to 75%. The situation in FIG. 33 is a gauge that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until the B time reduction is activated, triggered by the situation of being out of the reach state (that is, a negative situation for the player), and the actual remaining number of fluctuations. We are making adjustments toward. As an opportunity to raise the gauge, situations where the player has negative emotions (a situation where the player is out of reach, a situation where a predetermined number of fluctuations do not become a big hit, and a maximum of 4 special figure 1 holds are held. It is preferable to further adopt the special figure 1 entering the starting port in the state, etc.), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the big hit is completed (or after the RAM is cleared), 500 rotations to 520 rotations, etc. It may be provided as a special effect section in which the gauge is accumulated only during a specific number of fluctuations such as 600 rotations to 620 rotations, or as a section in which the gauge is more easily accumulated than in other sections. You may try to position it. Further, it may be produced so as to identify these special effect sections (for example, a "chance zone where it is easy to increase the gauge" is displayed), or conversely, the gauge is increased without changing the effect. As a section that is easy to play, it may be possible to have an element that only a knowledgeable player can enjoy.

Further, the gauge may be displayed at all times after the end of the big hit (or after the RAM is cleared), or the gauge may be displayed when the number of remaining fluctuations up to the B time reduction becomes less than a predetermined number of times. good. In the former case, the player can always provide the enjoyment of playing the game while anticipating the remaining number of fluctuations from the displayed gauge to the B time reduction, and in the latter case, the B time reduction is already performed at the timing when the gauge is displayed. Since the number of remaining fluctuations up to is small, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the upcoming fluctuations up to the B time reduction.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a C time reduction, if the gauge is accumulated halfway and the C time reduction is won, the gauge may be set to 100% at once due to the fluctuation. That is, as the information suggested by the gauge, not only the B time reduction but also the C time reduction can be used.

In addition, as the types of big hits, a big hit (first big hit) in which a low probability / high base state is given after the big hit is given, and an A time short in which a high probability / high base state is given after the big hit is finished. There is a big hit (second hit), and in any case, this example works more preferably in the playability that the same effect is executed during the big hit and during the A time reduction. Specifically, in the case of such playability, it is difficult for the player to judge from the production whether the first big hit or the second big hit is won, and further, the probability is low after the big hit is completed. It is also difficult to judge from the staging whether the A time reduction in the high base state is executed or the A time reduction in the high probability / high base state is executed. In such playability, in the case of the end of the first big hit, by shifting to the low probability state, the counting of the number of fluctuations (the number of operations n) from the end of the first big hit to the B time reduction is started. After the end of the first big hit, the B time reduction will be activated by the fluctuation of "760 rotations", but in the case after the end of the second big hit, it will be high after the end of the second big hit by shifting to the high probability state. Since the number of fluctuations (number of operations n) from the end of the A time reduction in the probability / high base state to the end of the B time reduction is counted, "the number of A time reductions + 760 rotations" is performed after the end of the second big hit. As a result, the B time reduction will be activated. That is, in a situation where the number of fluctuations (number of operations n) required from the end of the big hit to the operation of the B time reduction is unknown, the player can perform the effect of suggesting the remaining number of times until the B time reduction, so that the player can reach the B time reduction. It is possible to play the game while predicting the remaining number of fluctuations.

Next, a variable display mode of the decorative pattern in the normal state will be described.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the order in which the decorative symbols change and stop changing during the normal game (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and the arrows indicate a plurality of decorative symbols constituting one decorative symbol. It shows the direction of fluctuation in each of the objects. The correspondence between the arrow and the object is as follows, and during the fluctuation, only the numerical object is displayed for the decorative pattern inside. In addition, the letters A to E represent the order of suspension of fluctuation.
A, the number object B that constitutes the left decorative pattern, the character object C that constitutes the left decorative pattern, the number object D that constitutes the right decorative pattern, the character object E that constitutes the right decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern inside. Numeric objects that make up

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing from the fluctuation display to the fluctuation stop of the decorative symbol during the normal game (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. The state of a plurality of objects constituting the decorative pattern at the time of stopping the fluctuation will be described using the alphabets (A to E) representing the order of stopping the fluctuation in FIG. 34.

First, in FIG. 35 (1), the numerical objects constituting the decorative symbol on the left, which are variablely displayed in the variable direction of A, are stopped and displayed. Next, in FIG. 35 (2), the character object constituting the left decorative symbol, which has been variablely displayed in the variable direction of B, is stopped and displayed. Next, in FIG. 35 (3), the numerical objects constituting the decorative symbol on the right, which have been variablely displayed in the variable direction of C, are stopped and displayed. Next, in FIG. 35 (4), the character object constituting the right decorative symbol, which has been variablely displayed in the variable direction of D, is stopped and displayed. Next, in FIG. 35 (5), the numerical objects constituting the decorative symbol in the variable display in the variable direction of E are stopped and displayed. Finally, in FIG. 35 (6), the character object constituting the decorative symbol on the left and the character object constituting the decorative symbol on the right, which have already been stopped and displayed, are converted into numerical objects constituting the decorative symbol inside. By moving so as to approach each other, the character object finally becomes a character object constituting the decorative symbol inside, and is stopped and displayed together with the numerical object constituting the decorative symbol inside.

In this way, during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the normal state of the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment, the numerical object and the character object constituting the decorative symbol on the left fluctuate in different directions. Has the features to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which decorative symbol will eventually stop, unlike the variable display of a general decorative symbol in which the number object and the character object are integrally formed. , You will be able to fuel expectations until the end when fluctuations stop.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment is characterized in that it has only a numerical object as an object constituting the middle symbol in the variable stop display of the decorative symbol in the normal state. Since the decorative design inside is constructed by combining with the left and right character objects at the time of stop display, there is a wide variety of variable stop display compared to the conventional decorative pattern combination in which numbers and characters are integrated. It can be performed. In other words, the combination of the decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is "the number of character objects that make up the left decorative symbol x the number of character objects that make up the right decorative symbol", so it is more than before. A deep production is possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (4), a more characteristic feature is that different character objects are assigned to the left and right even though they are the same numerical object. Specifically, the correspondence is as follows.

(Decorative pattern on the left)
"1" + character A
"2" + character B
"3" + character C
"4" + character D
"5" + character F
"6" + character G
"7" + character H
"8" + character I

(Decorative pattern on the right)
"1" + character J
"2" + character K
"3" + character L
"4" + character M
"5" + character N
"6" + character O
"7" + character P
"8" + character Q
In other words, the character object that constitutes the middle symbol when it is out of reach after reach is "the number of character objects that make up the left decorative symbol (8) x the number of character objects that make up the right decorative symbol (8)". There are a total of 64 types.

Here, the character A of the left decorative pattern and the character J of the right decorative pattern, the character B of the left decorative pattern and the character K of the right decorative pattern, the character C of the left decorative pattern and the character L of the right decorative pattern. , Left decorative symbol character D and right decorative symbol character M, left decorative symbol character E and right decorative symbol character N, left decorative symbol character F and right decorative symbol character O, left It is desirable that the character G of the decorative symbol and the character P of the right decorative symbol, the character H of the left decorative symbol and the character Q of the right decorative symbol are related to each other. In other words, for the same number object with the left and right decorative patterns, by placing characters with relationships (brothers, parents and children, friends, rivals, the same team, etc.) on the work that is the concept of the pachinko game machine P. , When the left and right number objects reach, or when the three symbols on the left, middle, and right (in this case, the number objects) are stopped and displayed with Zoro eyes and become a big hit, the left and right decorative symbols are configured. The appearance of the character object to be displayed is improved when the character object is stopped and displayed as a character object constituting the decorative pattern inside. In particular, the more the player knows the work that became the concept of the pachinko gaming machine P, the greater the way to enjoy it.

Further, in FIGS. 35 (5) and 35 (6), after the numerical objects constituting the decorative symbols inside are stopped, the character objects of the left and right decorative symbols move only the display position without changing the display mode. However, the display mode may be changed as the character objects of the left and right decorative symbols move to the positions constituting the middle symbols. Specifically, the content such as changing the character from a sitting state to a standing state or changing the pose of the character can be considered. In this way, by changing the display mode (during change) of the character objects constituting the left and right decorative symbols and the display mode (stopping fluctuation) of the character objects constituting the decorative symbols inside, the displayed character object can be displayed. It becomes easy to identify which decorative pattern is a character object.

In addition, at the time of temporary stop due to pseudo-variation (pseudo-ream), the character object of the left and right decorative symbols is not moved to the position of the middle symbol, and the dedicated symbol suggesting that the pseudo-variation is performed at the position of the middle symbol. Is configured to re-variate after displaying. By doing so, it is possible not to be confused with the display mode of the decorative pattern when the fluctuation is actually stopped.

Although FIGS. 34 and 35 have been described as a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in the normal state, it is not necessary to adopt such a variable display mode in all the normal states, and it is adopted only in some production stages. Also, decoration in any of the gaming states of low probability / high base medium, high probability / low base medium, and high probability / high base medium as well as the normal state (low probability / low base medium). There is no problem even if it is adopted as a variable display mode of the design. Further, in this case, in one staging stage, the variation is performed in the variation display mode of the decorative symbol described so far, and in the other staging stage, the numerical object and the character object constituting the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the same manner. By configuring the mode, reach is formed in a situation where the character objects constituting the left and right decorative symbols are different in one staging stage, and the character objects constituting the left and right decorative symbols are the same in the other staging stages. Since the reach is formed in the situation, it is possible to enhance the peculiarity of the variable display mode of the decorative pattern in one staging stage.

Further, even during the period in which the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is adopted, there may be a special variation such that all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are composed of a number object and a character object.

Next, an example of the reach effect in the normal state will be described.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an effect flow of the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is an effect flow related to battle reach, which is one of the reach effects executed after the decorative symbol is in the reach state. ..

First, after the decorative symbol reaches reach, if the deadly mission P1100 is executed among multiple reach effects, the mission effect that presents the clear conditions for the effect is executed, and if the mission is successful. Stocks 1 to 3 "deadly" in the staging display device. On the other hand, if the mission fails, the reach effect will end, and the decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed with the combination of the missed symbols.

Next, when one or more "special kills" are stocked in the special mission P1100 (that is, when the mission production is successful), the battle reach, which is a reach production in which the ally character battles with the enemy character, is executed. .. The battle reach consists of three parts, the first half, the middle stage, and the second half, and the reach production is performed with the aim of defeating the enemy character by using the "special kill" stocked in P1100. Therefore, the victory expectation (big hit expectation) in the battle reach is higher when three "deadly" are stocked than when one is stocked at P1100.

Next, in P1110 in the first half of the battle reach, if 3 "Special" are stocked in P1100, by using the "Special" stocked in the production display device in P1120, the ally character will perform the special move. Will be done. Here, if the enemy character is defeated by the special move performed by the ally character, it becomes a big hit, and if it cannot be defeated, the process proceeds to P1130 in the middle of the battle reach.

Next, in the middle stage of battle reach P1130, if 3 "deadly" are stocked in P1100, or if 2 are stocked, by using the "deadly" stocked in the staging display device in P1140. , A production is performed in which a ally character performs a special move. Here, if the enemy character is defeated by the special move performed by the ally character, it becomes a big hit, and if it cannot be defeated, the process proceeds to P1150 in the latter half of the battle reach.

Next, in the latter half of the battle reach P1150, if three "deadly" are stocked in P1100, two are stocked, or one is stocked, stock is stocked in the staging display device at P1160. By using the "Special" that has been done, an ally character will perform a special move. Here, if the enemy character is defeated by the special move performed by the ally character, it becomes a big hit, and if it cannot be defeated, the battle reach ends, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol combination that is out of place. In addition, only in the latter half of the battle reach, there is a pattern in which a revival effect that becomes a hit is executed after being temporarily stopped with a combination of symbols that are once out of order. Also, only in the latter half of the battle reach, a cut-in effect that suggests a jackpot expectation may be executed on P1170, and if the cut-in effect is executed, only one "deadly" is tentatively executed on P1100. Even if it cannot be stocked, it is configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when three "deadly" are stocked on P1100 and the cut-in effect is not executed on P1170. If only one "Special" is stocked on P1100, "Special" will always be used at the timing of the latter half of the battle reach.

Further, when shifting from the middle stage of the battle reach P1130 to the latter half of the battle reach P1150, there is a case of shifting to the F zone P1180 having a higher expectation of a big hit than the latter half of the battle reach P1150. Even if you move to the F zone, the battle with the enemy character is still taking place as in the latter half of the battle reach, so by using "Special" at the timing of P1190, the ally character will perform a special move. .. Here, if the enemy character is defeated by the special move performed by the ally character, it becomes a big hit, and if it cannot be defeated, the battle reach ends, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol combination that is out of place. In addition, as in the latter half of the battle reach, even when passing through F-ZONE, it has a pattern in which a revival effect is executed after a revival effect after being temporarily stopped with a combination of symbols that are once off. There is.

Next, FIGS. 37 to 47 are image diagrams of the battle reach described with reference to FIG. 36, and the content of the effect at each timing of FIG. 36 will be specifically described.

First, FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and shows the effect during the deadly mission of FIG. 36. In FIG. 37, the mission production is successful, and three "deadly" are stocked on the left side of the screen. There are a plurality of types of "deadly" to be stocked according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. In FIG. 37, two types of "specially weak" and "specially strong" are stocked, but there may be a plurality of other types. As the display mode of "special" at the time of stock, it may be displayed side by side in the order of acquisition of stock, or may be displayed in order of expectation of big hit.

Next, FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and shows the state at the start of the battle reach. In FIG. 38, the guidance suggests to the player that if 100 enemies can be defeated using the stocked "deadly", it will be a big hit.

Next, FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and in the first half of the battle reach, the ally character uses the first stocked “deadly weakness”. It shows how he was able to attack an enemy character and defeat 100 people, which is a condition for producing a big hit. At this time, since only one "deadly" was used, the remaining two are left unused.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and shows a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination after FIG. 39.

Next, FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and in the first half of the battle reach, the ally character uses the first stocked “deadly weakness”. It shows that although he attacked an enemy character, he could not defeat 100 people, which is a condition for directing a big hit. In this case, proceed to the middle of the battle reach with the remaining "deadly" stocked.

Next, FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and in the first half of the battle reach, the ally character uses the second stocked “deadly weakness”. It shows that although he attacked an enemy character, he could not defeat 100 people, which is a condition for directing a big hit. In this case, proceed to the second half of the battle reach with the remaining "deadly" stocked. Although not shown, if 100 people, which is a condition for producing a big hit, can be defeated here, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the big hit symbols, as in FIG. 40.

Next, FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram 7 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and in the latter half of the battle reach, the ally character uses the third stocked “deadly strength”. It shows how he was able to attack an enemy character and defeat 100 people, which is a condition for producing a big hit. After that, as in FIG. 40, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol combination.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram 8 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and in the latter half of the battle reach of FIG. 43, the ally character uses the third stocked “deadly strength”. It shows that although he attacked an enemy character, he could not defeat 100 people, which is a condition for directing a big hit.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram 9 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and shows a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols after FIG. 44.

Next, FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram 10 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and in the latter half of the battle reach, the cut-in effect of P1170 of FIG. It shows how a friendly character attacks an enemy character using the "special strength" and defeats 100 people, which is a condition for producing a big hit.

Next, FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram 11 showing the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in which the F zone of P1180 of FIG. 36 is executed and the third stocked “deadly strength” is used. Then, the ally character attacks the enemy character and defeats 100 people, which is a condition for the production to be a big hit.

Among the production elements in the entire battle reach, when arranged in descending order of jackpot expectation, "F zone"> "cut-in"> "number of deadly stocks". In other words, it is relatively big hit expectation that it shifts to battle reach when the "deadly stock number" is 3 rather than shifting to battle reach when the "deadly stock number" is 1. Will be higher. On the other hand, the cut-in was executed in the latter half of the battle reach when the "deadly stock number" was 1, rather than the cut-in not being executed in the latter half of the battle reach when the "deadly stock number" was 3. The higher the expectation of a big hit. On the other hand, rather than the cut-in being executed in the latter half of the battle reach when the "deadly stock number" is 3, the F zone does not shift to the latter half of the battle reach when the "deadly stock number" is 1. The higher the expectation of a big hit, the higher the shift to.

In this way, in the battle reach, which is one of the reach effects in the pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit is the same as the number of "deadly" stocks stocked before the start of the battle reach. Since the winning effect that is definitely notified is executed, it is a production that is different from the general reach effect in which the winning effect is performed only at the final timing. With this configuration, the timing of deterministically notifying the jackpot by the number of stocked "deadly" increases, so it is possible to prevent the long reach effect from becoming redundant. Also, in a state where multiple "deadly" are stocked, that is, in a situation where it is certain that multiple chance productions will be executed, a pattern that notifies the jackpot without using all the stocked "deadly" By having it, it is possible to perform a jackpot notification contrary to the player's expectation.

[Second Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technique. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite techniques will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technique will be described with the same reference numerals.

The second embodiment is a "small hit V (1 type 2 type mixer)" type gaming machine specification, and the basic structure of the board surface will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. The normal game state is a low probability / low base state, and by winning a big hit with a probability of 1/319 in the lottery related to the first special symbol performed by entering the first start winning device P710. It shifts to the jackpot game state.

If a big hit is made in the lottery related to the 1st special symbol, either 4 rounds of "R battle bonus" or 7 rounds of "R battle bonus" is executed according to the big hit symbol, and 4 rounds are executed. After the end of the "R Battle Bonus", the probability shifts to a high probability state, and after the end of the 7 rounds of the "R Battle Bonus", the normal state is reached. The winning ratio between the 4th round "R Battle Bonus" and the 7th round "R Battle Bonus" is 50%: 50%.

After the end of the 4th round "R Battle Bonus", the "Bounty Rush" in which the electric chew support function is activated only once is executed, and in the lottery related to the 2nd special symbol, a small hit with a probability of 1/1 is won. By doing so, a big hit of 9 rounds is executed when the ball enters a specific area (V area) during the small hit game. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the maximum number of holdings related to the second special symbol is set to three, and by hitting right during a small hit, the ball almost certainly enters a specific area (V area). Because it is configured to be You can expect a small hit + 9 rounds of big hits.

There are two types of small hits in "Bounty Rush" + 9 rounds of big hits. If the "END Bonus" in which the electric chew support does not operate after the end is won, the state shifts to the normal state after the end of the big hit, and a series of advantageous states ends. In other words, the "Bounty Bonus" is won by one of a total of four fluctuations, that is, the fluctuation of the second special symbol due to the operation of the electric chew support during the "bounty rush" and the fluctuation related to the three reserved symbols of the second special symbol. If this happens, the "Bounty Rush" will continue again, and if all of the four fluctuations in total win the "END Bonus", the game will shift to the normal state.

If you win the 1/50 time saving symbol in the normal state, you will move to the "ALIVE zone" of C time saving. In the "ALIVE zone", any of 10 times, 20 times, and 30 times of the electric chew support function is activated depending on the type of the time saving symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, when the big hit is won in the lottery related to the first special symbol while the electric chew support function is operating, the electric chew support function is always activated. If you win a big hit with a probability of 1/319 in the lottery related to the 1st special symbol in the "ALIVE zone", a "rush bonus" of 4 rounds or 7 rounds will be performed. , After the end of "Rush Bonus", be sure to shift to "Bounty Rush" where the electric chew support function is activated. In other words, in the normal state, if you win the jackpot with a probability of 1/319 in the lottery related to the 1st special symbol and you win the special symbol that becomes the "R battle bonus", you will shift to "Bounty Rush". If you win a jackpot with a probability of 1/319 during the 10 to 30 "ALIVE Zones" that will be transferred by winning the 1/50 time-saving symbol in the lottery related to the pattern to be played and the 1st special symbol, " It has two transition routes, one is the transition to "Bounty Rush". The number of times the time saving symbol and the electric chew support function are activated is not limited to the above.

Here, it has been explained that the "ALIVE zone" is in a state where the electric chew support function is activated, but the three functions constituting the electric chew support function (ordinary symbol probability change, ordinary symbol time reduction, (ordinary electric accessory). ) Of the opening extension), the normal symbol probability change and the normal symbol time reduction are not working, and the opening extension of the normal electric accessory has only a function that is slightly easier to open than in the normal state. Therefore, although the electric chew support function is activated internally, it does not essentially play a role as the electric chew support function, and the first special performed by entering the first start winning device P710. The main game state is to draw lots for the symbols.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the relationship between the time reduction of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment and the gaming state, and is an image diagram showing the relationship between the electric chew support function and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment. Is.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has two types of ordinary symbols, and the winning probability of each is 99/100 for the ordinary symbol 1 and 1/100 for the ordinary symbol 2. Of the three functions that make up the "electric chew support function," there are two patterns for extending the opening of the ordinary electric accessory: a pattern in which the ordinary electric accessory operates short and a pattern in which the ordinary electric accessory operates for a long time. It has an open pattern. The short is the time during which the normal electric accessory operates to the extent that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning device, and the long is the time during which the game ball is easy to enter the second start winning device. It is the time when the electric accessory is normally operated to some extent.

In the normal state, the normal electric accessory is short-operated regardless of which of the normal symbol 1 having a probability of 99/100 and the normal symbol 2 having a probability of 1/100 is won. The game ball cannot be won by the starting winning device. In the C time reduction (“ALIVE zone”), if the normal symbol 1 with a probability of 99/100 is won, the normal electric accessory is short-operated, and if either the normal symbol 2 with a probability of 1/100 is won, Since the electric accessory is normally operated for a long time, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to win the second start winning device. In A time reduction ("Bounty Rush"), the normal electric accessory operates for a long time regardless of which of the normal symbol 1 with a probability of 99/100 and the normal symbol 2 with a probability of 1/100 is won. Because of the state, it is easy to make the second start winning device win the game ball. That is, in the "ALIVE zone" where the C time is shortened, the probability that the normal electric accessory operates for a long time (normal state: 0/100, C time reduction: 1/100) is slightly increased as compared with the normal state. It can be said that the electric chew support function is operating, but it can be seen that there is almost no difference in the ball ejection performance. However, in the normal state, if you win a big hit with a probability of 1/319 in the lottery related to the 1st special symbol, you will only have a 50% chance of shifting to the advantageous state "Bounty Rush", but in C time reduction In a certain "ALIVE zone", if you win a big hit with a probability of 1/319 in the lottery related to the first special symbol, there is a 100% chance that you will move to the advantageous state "Bounty Rush", which is a normal state. It can be said that the C time reduction is far more advantageous than the C time reduction.

In this way, while there is almost no difference in the electric chew support function compared to the normal state, in the case of a big hit, the electric chew support function is more likely to operate than in the normal state (hereinafter, the role). By providing a C time reduction with a chance zone), a special game state is created in which the degree of advantage is higher than in the normal state if a big hit is achieved in the current game state in the normal state of waiting for the big hit to be won. be able to.

In addition, in the normal state, in addition to winning the big hit, this also builds a playability that can be expected to win the time-saving symbol that shifts to the C time reduction. Therefore, for example, "whether to win the big hit or Or, a production that informs you that you actually won the time-saving symbol in the same way as the revival production after the reach production that suggests a big hit fails or the reach production that simultaneously encourages you to win the time-saving symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and a special effect suggesting only the winning of the time-saving symbol may be performed.

During the "ALIVE zone" of C time reduction, it is clear that it is certain that it will shift to "Bounty Rush" if it becomes a big hit in the current game state, as well as a production that suggests that it is an "ALIVE zone". You may make an effect to notify the person. In addition, it may be possible to notify at the time of winning which time-saving symbol has been won, or an effect of notifying whether or not the "ALIVE zone" will continue at the 10th and 20th times may be performed.

In addition, if a time saving symbol is further won during the C time saving "ALIVE zone", the "ALIVE zone" based on the newly won time saving symbol may be overwritten and executed, or the newly won time saving symbol may be executed. The "ALIVE zone" based on the symbol may not be executed. Alternatively, after the executing "ALIVE zone" is completed, the remaining number of times of the "ALIVE zone" based on the newly elected time saving symbol may be executed. The relationship between the A time reduction and the B time reduction can also be appropriately changed and adopted as described above.

Further, in the game flow relating to the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. 48, only the C time reduction is positioned as the role of the chance zone, but the same game performance is constructed by using the A time reduction and the B time reduction. You may. Specifically, to explain using FIG. 48 as an example, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery related to the first special symbol in the normal state, be sure to shift to the Chan zone of A time reduction, and in the chance zone of A time reduction. In addition, if a big hit is made again in the lottery related to the first special symbol, the playability may be such that the game shifts to "Bounty Rush". Only the A time reduction may be used as the chance zone, only the C time reduction may be used as the chance zone, or both the A time reduction and the C time reduction may be used as the chance zone. Needless to say, the B time reduction may be used as a chance zone, and it is possible to appropriately combine them according to the playability.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has been described by taking as an example a "small hit V (1 type 2 type mixer)" type gaming machine specification, but for any game playability such as V probability variation and ST. There is no problem even if it is applied.

[Third Example]
Subsequently, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in particular in the structure of the large winning device P750 (large winning opening P751), and the third embodiment shown below is a large winning device which is a feature point. The structure of the P750 and the game machine specifications (specs, game flow) of the pachinko machine suitable for the adoption of the big prize device P750 will be described.

In the description in the third embodiment, some game machine specifications that employ the large prize-winning device P750, which is a feature point, are exemplified, but the game machine specifications are also new and provide highly entertaining playability. In some examples of gaming machine specifications, the structure of the large winning device P750, which is a feature of the third embodiment, is not necessarily adopted, but the structure of the conventional large winning device is adopted as the gaming machine specifications. It should be added that some of them can be installed in pachinko machines.

(Structure of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment)
First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 50 is a front view including the gaming machine frame structure (outer frame P1, front frame P2, glass frame P3) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, and FIG. 51 is a front view of the gaming board P5. ..

《Frame structure》
As shown in FIG. 50, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment has a different appearance from the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and the pachinko gaming machines from the present embodiment to the second embodiment, but is different. The part that is used is mainly the design aspect, and the essential structure of the pachinko gaming machine is the same as that of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and the pachinko gaming machines of the second embodiment from the present embodiment. Except for the above differences, detailed explanations are omitted.

Regarding the structure of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the major differences between the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment are the design of the frame lamp P350 and the production operation unit P380. The design and structure of.

The structure of the frame lamp P350 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is such that the design of the frame lamp P350 on the right side when viewed from the player protrudes greatly forward from the frame lamp P350 on the left side, and further upward. It has a structure that protrudes toward. The right-side frame lamp P350 is detachably configured with respect to the glass frame P3, and the right-side frame lamp P350 is configured to include an effect sheet according to the model installed as the game board P5. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using an effect sheet. Further, although it is not visible in FIG. 50, the frame speaker P370 is arranged above the inside of the right frame lamp P350, and pairs with the frame speaker P370 on the upper left side of the glass frame P3 to form the upper speaker P371. It has become like. The right frame lamp P350 can be attached not only to a unit containing an effect sheet as shown in FIG. 50, but also to a unit having a movable object or structure such as a frame movable accessory P360 or a figure depending on the product. Is.

As shown in FIG. 50, the structure of the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment has a structure in which the effect button P381 is arranged on the top of the design unit imitating an alien character. Further, the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment also has a function as an effect lever P382 like the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and the like, and can display the head of a character imitating an alien. It is possible to perform an input operation by tilting the player to the player side (front).

The effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment moves to the unlocked position unlike the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine or the like, which is assumed when the input operation is performed as the effect lever P382. It is configured so that the tilting operation can be executed by operating a lock mechanism (for example, a lock member driven by a solenoid or the like) provided inside (for example, a lock member driven by a solenoid or the like), which does not perform a displacement operation for performing the displacement operation. ..

Further, the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment has a role as a frame movable accessory P360 configured to be operable for the purpose of effect operation, not for the purpose of unlocking. The staging operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment can move the head of a character imitating an alien in the front-back and left-right directions with the position shown in FIG. 50 as a reference point, and can move the head of the character in the front-back or left-right direction. It is configured to be able to perform a swinging motion, a circling motion of the head, and the like, and it is possible to perform an operation input staging such as a button staging, and an accessory motion staging as a advance notice staging and a look-ahead staging.

<< Game board structure: Game area >>
Subsequently, the structure of the gaming board of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment sandwiches a center accessory P540 (or an effect display device P80) arranged in the center of the gaming board as a gaming area P501. It is designed to have a left side area P501L on the left side and a right side area P501R on the right side, and by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball by the operation amount of the player's handle P204, any game area of the player. It is configured so that the game balls can be shot separately.

When a game ball is launched against the left game area P501L, it is easy to win a prize in the first start winning device P710 (first starting port P711) and the left general winning device P730L (left general winning school P731L), and the right side. When a game ball is fired at the area P501R, the normal operating gate device P740 (normally operating port P741), the second starting winning device P720 (second starting opening P721), the large winning device P750 (large winning port P751), and the right side. It is configured to be able to win a prize in the general winning device P730R (right general winning school P731R). An out port P790 is arranged at the lower position of the game board for the purpose of discharging the game balls that do not win any prize.

In the third embodiment, in some game machine specifications (specs / game flow) described later, two start winning openings are provided in the right area P501 (combination of the first starting winning opening P711 and the second starting winning opening P721). , Or a combination of the second starting winning opening P721 and another second starting winning opening P721), but if there is such a need, the gaming machine described later will be used. Describe as necessary in the explanation of the specifications. Regarding the position of the case where the second starting winning opening is provided, an example is conceivable in which the starting winning opening not related to the ordinary electric accessory is arranged instead of the above-mentioned right general winning opening P730R.

《Game board structure: staging characters and other staging devices》
The area surrounded by the center accessory P540 and a part of the back of the transparent game board forming the game area P501, which is a substantially central area of the game board, have various effects to enhance the effect of the game machine. The device is arranged.

In the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, as the effect device arranged in the effect area of the game board P5, the effect display device P80 for displaying the effect, one logo light emitting unit P690 of the board lamp P550 for performing the light emission effect, and the effect. It has a staging character P560 that performs an operation and a light emitting effect, and is configured to have a character character P691 and other staging characters (not shown) as the staging character P560 in particular. Further, although not shown, a light guide plate having a light emitting effect unit is arranged in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 in the opening of the center accessory P540.

(Structure of Grand Prize Device: Feature Configuration 1 of the Third Example)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56, the structure of the large prize-winning device P750 adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment will be described. 52 to 56 show the structure of the large prize device P750 in a state where the integrated unit of the large prize device P750 and the right side general prize device P730R shown in FIG. 51 is configured and the unit front cover covering the front of the large prize device P750 is removed. Shows. Note that FIG. 51 shows the position of the large winning device P750 by the dotted line region.

52 is a front view (a) and a rear view (b) of the large winning device P750 in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, and FIG. 53 is a large winning device for the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of P750. 54 to 56 show the detailed structure of the flow path configuration regarding the winning and discharging of the game ball of the big winning device P750.

<< Outline and effects of the structural features of the prize-winning device >>
The large winning device P750 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is a large winning opening slide plate P7533 (1) that changes the ease of winning the large winning opening P751 (large winning opening opening P7540) of the large winning device P750. For the large winning opening slide plate P7533 (upper and forward two directions), for the large winning opening P751 (large winning opening opening P7540). It is structured so that you can win a prize. Specifically, a game ball flowing down the two flow paths of arrows A and B shown in FIGS. 52 and 54 is configured to be able to win a prize for the large winning opening P751 (large winning opening opening P7540), and in particular. , Arrow A and Arrow B are configured in the rolling direction of the game ball in the opposite direction, so that it is possible to make the occupied area of the big prize device on the game board small. Is.

The large winning device P750 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment has a delay mechanism (also referred to as a “deceleration mechanism”, the details of which will be described later) in two winning areas having different flow directions shown by arrows A and B. When the player keeps firing the game ball into the right side area P501R by arranging it or providing a direction changing portion to slow down the rolling speed of the game ball, the winning area of the large winning device P750 (the winning area ( The game balls are configured to stay about 8 to 10 balls in the section of arrow A and arrow B (the number of staying balls is slightly up and down), and the opening operation of the big winning opening slide plate P7533 of the big winning device P750 is performed. Along with this, it is configured so that 8 to 10 balls can be won in a short time for one opening, and it is easy to win a short time unit game during a big hit game (a short time winning pattern defined in the opening pattern of the big winning device P750). It is configured so that a large amount of winning can be expected even in the opening operation of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 for a short time of the small hit game.

<< Detailed structure of the prize-winning device >>
As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the large winning device P750 adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is attached from the base plate P7520 fixed to the gaming board P5 and the back surface of the base plate P7520. A large prize device main body P7530 that exposes a part (winning area) from the base plate opening P7525 to the front of the game board, and a part of the flow path of the large prize device P750 that is attached to the front side of the base plate P7520. It has an inner unit front decoration P7500. As shown in FIG. 51, the large winning device P750 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is combined with the right general winning device P730R to form an integrated unit, and is in front of the unit covering the front of the unit in the entire area. Since it is arranged so as to be included in the cover, the grand prize device P750 may be referred to as an "inner unit".

The inner unit front decoration P7500 constitutes a part of the flow path structure of the winning area in the large winning device P750, the structure of the unit front cover (not shown), and the discharge flow path (arrow C in FIG. 52). ..

The inner unit front decoration P7500 is composed of two members, an inner unit front decoration base P7515 and an inner unit front decoration flow path cover P7516. A part of the second flow path (the section shown by the arrow B and the rolling section of the game ball overlapping in front of the large winning opening slide plate P7533), which constitutes a part of the game ball rolling on P7533). Make up a part.

Further, the inner unit front decoration P7500 has a deceleration protrusion B_P7502, a deceleration protrusion D_P7503, a deceleration protrusion F_P7504, a deceleration protrusion G_P7509, a meandering flow path A_P7510, and a meandering flow path B_P7512 as a delay mechanism for the game ball. Since other delay mechanisms are arranged on the base plate P7520 or the like in the prize-winning device P750, the overall configuration of the delay mechanism that exerts the action and effect of deceleration will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 54.

At the most downstream position of the winning area of the inner unit front decoration P7500 (the area after the end of the winning area), the winning area discharge port P7513 is provided, and the game ball that has fallen downward from the winning area discharge port P7513. Is configured to roll in the direction of the arrow C shown in FIG. 52 and roll toward the downstream structure (right side general winning device P730R and out port P790) in the game board P5. Further, at the position of the winning portion discharge port P7513, there is a flow path discharge sub-sensor P7514 sandwiched and held between the inner unit front decoration base P7515 and the inner unit front decoration flow path cover P7516.

The flow path discharge sub-sensor P7514 is not shown, and is a staging control board together with the flow path intrusion sub-sensor P7518 arranged in the vicinity (upstream side) of the reception opening P7501 where the game ball first reaches the grand prize device P750. The number of game balls connected to P41 (staging control CPU) and staying in the winning area of the large winning device P750 (the number of game balls to be won when the large winning opening slide plate P7533 is opened and it becomes easy to win a prize. The number) can be grasped by the staging control board P41. The flow path discharge sub-sensor P7514 and the flow path intrusion sub-sensor P7518 are not sensors connected to the staging control board P41, but sensors connected to the main control board P40 (main control CPU) as needed (for example, an operating port sensor). The large prize device P750 can be won by receiving the effect control command regarding the passage of these sensors from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41, which also functions as P42 and the accessory continuous operation device operation gate P780). It may be to grasp the number of game balls staying in the area.

Here, the "character continuous operation device operating gate" is one of the game machine specifications, and automatically after the stop display of the special symbol (stop display of the jackpot symbol) at which the accessory continuous operation device is activated. After the stop display of the special symbol that grants the right to operate the character continuous operation device without the accessory continuous operation device operating (the big hit game starts), it becomes the "character continuous operation device operation gate". The game in which the character continuous operation device is operated on condition that the game ball passes through the sensor (accessory continuous operation device operation gate P780), that is, the big hit game is started (shifts to the big hit start demo state). It is a specification of the machine.

The base plate P7520 is a member for fixing the big prize device P750 to the game board P5, and is a member for holding the inner unit front decoration P7500 and the big prize device main body P7530. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the base plate P7520 is fixed to the unit front cover, and the unit front cover is fixed to the game board P5 from the front. The base plate P7520 and the unit front cover may be fixed to the game board P5 from the front, respectively.

The base plate P7520 has a base plate opening P7525 for exposing important parts involved in winning, such as the large winning opening opening P7540 (large winning opening P751) of the large winning device main body P7530, to the front of the game board P5. As a delay mechanism, it has a deceleration protrusion A_P7521, a deceleration protrusion C_P7522, a deceleration protrusion E_P7523, and a turning rib P7524. Since other delay mechanisms are arranged on the inner unit front decoration P7500 or the like in the grand prize device P750, the overall configuration of the delay mechanism that exerts the action and effect of deceleration will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 54. do.

As shown in FIG. 53, the prize-winning device main body P7530 is configured by combining a large number of members. As members constituting the large winning device main body P7530, in order from the top of FIG. 53, the upper cover P7531, the large winning opening slide plate P7533, the link P7536, the large winning opening solenoid P7537, the large winning device main body base P7538, and the discharge unit P7543. Have.

The upper cover P7531 is a member that is combined with the large winning device main body base P7538 to hold the large winning opening slide plate P7533, the link P7536, and the large winning opening solenoid P7537 in the mechanism accommodating portion P7539 of the large winning device main body base P7538. Is. The upper cover P7531 has a guide groove P7532 provided so as to extend in the operating direction of the large winning opening slide plate P7533, and the guide rib P7534 of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 is inserted so as to be movable inside the groove. By being held, it is configured to stabilize the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening slide plate P7533.

In the large winning opening slide plate P7533, the space above the upper surface including the upper surface thereof is set as the first flow path (arrow A) which is a winning area of the large winning device P750, and the front edge in the operating direction of the plate is the large winning device. It is a member that functions as one side wall of the second flow path (arrow B), which is a winning area of P750. A guide rib P7534 is provided on the rear end side of the upper surface of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 in the operating direction, and is inserted through the guide groove P7532 of the upper cover as described above to stabilize the operation of the large winning opening slide plate P7533. Has been done. Further, a deceleration protrusion H_P7535 is provided on the tip edge of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 in the operating direction, and serves a part of the delay mechanism of the large winning device P750.

The link P7536 has a shape bent in an abbreviated shape, a rotation axis is inserted through the apex of the curved portion, and the large winning opening slide plate P7533 and the large winning opening solenoid P7537 are interlocked at both ends. There are elongated holes and notches that allow the operating shaft and operating plate to pass through.

The large winning opening solenoid P7537 is a drive source for the large winning opening slide plate P7533, and by linearly operating the operating axis of the solenoid, the link P7536 is swung (rotated) to move the large winning opening slide plate P7533 back and forth. Generates power to move in the direction. Further, the large winning opening solenoid P7537 is inserted into the mechanism accommodating portion P7539 provided in the large winning opening main body base P7538, and is held in the space formed by the upper cover P7531 and the mechanism accommodating portion P7539. ing.

The large winning device main body base P7538 has a mechanism accommodating portion P7539 for holding a drive source and a drive mechanism related to the operation of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 such as the above-mentioned large winning opening solenoid P7537, and also has a large winning opening opening. A box-shaped structure forming a space for P7540 and a second flow path bottom surface portion P7541 forming the bottom surface of the second flow path are formed. Further, a large winning opening winning sensor P7542 (large winning opening sensor P752) is arranged on the downstream end side where the game ball rolls in the space forming the large winning opening opening P7540, and the large winning opening winning sensor P7542 is arranged. The game ball that has passed through is configured to enter the discharge unit P7543. The second flow path bottom surface portion P7541 may be configured so that a structure having the same function is formed on the inner unit front decoration flow path cover P7515 of the inner unit front decoration P7500.

The discharge unit P7543 has a function of discharging the game ball won in the large prize device P750 to the outside of the game area of the game board P5, and further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, a specific area (V area) inside. It is configured to have a specific area slide plate P7545 and a specific area sensor P7546. The discharge unit P7543 receives the game ball that has passed through the large prize opening winning sensor P7542 of the large winning device main body base PP7538 from the entrance opening P7544, and passes through either the specific area sensor P7546 or the discharge sensor P7547 to the outside of the game area. It is configured to eject the game ball to. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the specific area slide plate P7545 and the specific area sensor P7546 as the specific area (V area) may not be provided.

Next, the flow of the game ball flowing down the grand prize device P750 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment and the deceleration action of the delay mechanism (deceleration mechanism) of the grand prize device P750 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. conduct.

When the game ball launched into the right area P501R of the game board P5 reaches the big prize device P750, the game ball is first received by the receiving opening P7501 provided in the inner unit front decoration P7500. The game ball received in the reception opening P7501 is flowed down toward the rear (back side when viewed from the player) of the grand prize device P750 by the inclined surface provided on the bottom surface of the reception opening P7501, and the base plate. The large winning opening slide plate P7533 (on the first flow path) is shown in FIG. 54 along the inclined surface that hits the plate surface of P7520 (the back side surface of the first flow path) and is inclined downward on the left side when viewed from the player. It rolls in the A direction and flows down (in other words, the game ball is guided toward the A direction by the large winning opening slide plate P7533).

During the period in which the game ball is rolling in the first flow path on the large winning opening slide plate P7533, the game ball has a deceleration protrusion A_P7521, a deceleration protrusion B_P7502, and a deceleration protrusion provided on the inner unit front decoration P7500 and the base plate P7520. It is decelerated while colliding with the protrusion C_P7522, the deceleration protrusion D_p7503, the deceleration protrusion E_P7523, and the deceleration protrusion F_P7504, and slowly flows down on the large winning opening slide plate P7533 while meandering in the front-rear direction when viewed from the player. Then, when it reaches the downstream end side of the large winning opening slide plate P, it comes into contact with the direction changing rib P7524 provided on the base plate P7520, and the rolling direction is changed to the front side (forward direction) when viewed from the player. It flows down to the second flow path side. When the large winning opening slide plate P7533 is displaced to a state where it is easy to win, that is, when the large winning opening device P750 is in the open state, the game ball existing on the large winning opening slide plate P7533 and the large winning opening prize. The game ball that has reached the position of the mouth slide plate P7533 falls substantially vertically from above through the large prize opening opening P7540 and wins the large prize device P750.

The game ball whose flow direction is changed forward by the direction changing rib P7524 at the final end of the first flow path passes through the second flow path receiving opening P7505 of the inner unit front decoration P7500, and passes through the second flow path receiving opening P7505, and the grand prize device main body base P7530. It falls on the bottom surface portion P7541 of the second flow path. Here, the second flow path bottom surface portion P7541 of the large prize device main body base P7530 is exposed forward from the lower portion of the front prize opening opening P7511 provided in the inner unit front decoration P7500. The second flow path front side wall P7506 and the second flow path rear side wall P7507 of the unit front decoration P7500 form a gutter-shaped second flow path inclined downward on the right side. Then, the game ball that has passed through the second flow path receiving opening P7505 of the inner unit front decoration P7500 and has fallen onto the second flow path bottom surface portion P7541 of the grand prize device main body base P7530 passes through the gutter-shaped second flow path. It rolls down in the direction of arrow B in the direction opposite to the first flow path (opposite direction).

In the second flow path, as a delay mechanism (deceleration mechanism), a deceleration protrusion G_P7509, a meandering flow path portion A_P7510, a deceleration protrusion H_P7535, and a meandering flow path portion provided on the inner unit front decoration P7500 and the large winning opening slide plate P7533 are provided. The B_P7512 is configured to cause the game ball to collide and decelerate, and to meander and flow down so that the game ball slowly flows down downstream. When the large winning opening slide plate P7533 is displaced to a state where winning is easy, that is, when the large winning device P750 is in the open state, the meandering flow path portion A_P7510 and the meandering flow path portion B_P7512 are located behind the game board at the downstream end side. Since the game ball is guided in the direction (back side when viewed from the player), the large winning opening slide plate P7533 is retracted and is open from the front through the front winning opening P7511 and the large winning opening opening P7540. Win a prize in the winning device P750.

Further, on the upstream side of the front winning opening P7511 of the second flow path, a rear side wall that cannot win a prize from the front of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 is provided on the second flow path as the second flow path accelerating portion P7508. ing. The second flow path accelerating unit P7508 moves to the first flow path side due to the reaction of the game ball that has fallen into the second flow path through the second flow path receiving opening P7505 and collides with the second flow path front side wall P7506. By preventing interference with the game ball rolling in the flow path and forming an acceleration section for accelerating the game ball that has fallen into the second flow path in the downward direction, a direction change section (direction change rib P7524) is formed. It is provided to rectify the game ball up to (the downstream end of the second flow path accelerating unit P7508) and smooth the flow of the game ball in the entire prize-winning device P750.

When the game ball flowing down the second flow path exceeds the flow-down end portion (downstream end of the front winning opening P7511) of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 which constitutes a part of the winning area. It falls downward through the winning portion discharge port P7513 and is discharged from the winning area of the large winning device P750. Then, it is configured to flow down in the direction of arrow C shown in FIG. 52 on the flow-down path formed by the plate surface in front of the inner unit front decoration P7500 and the unit front cover.

On the other hand, while flowing down the first flow path and the second flow path, the game ball that has won the grand prize device P750 has a large winning opening opening as shown in FIG. 55 (b) (FIG. 55 (a) A cross section). The bottom surface of the box-shaped space forming the portion P7540 flows down to the downstream side (left side), penetrates into the inside of the discharge unit P7543 through the entrance opening P7544 of the large winning opening winning sensor P7542 and the discharge unit P7543, and the specific area slide plate P7545 When the specific area solenoid P7548 is activated and is in an open state (winning easy state), it is discharged to the outside of the game area P501 through the specific area sensor P7546 (first discharging unit), and the specific area slide plate P7545 is closed (winning). In the case of a difficult state), it is discharged to the outside of the game area P501 through the discharge sensor P7547 (second discharge unit).

The above is the structure of the big prize device P750, which is one of the characteristic configurations of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment. Such a structure (it is possible to flow into the opening / closing portion of 1 from a plurality of rolling directions). The variable winning opening) is not limited to the large winning device, and may be adopted as a winning opening (starting opening) related to an ordinary electric accessory.

Further, in the specifications of various gaming machines which are the characteristic configurations of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment shown below, while the structure of the above-mentioned grand prize device P750 works effectively, the grand prize having the above-mentioned configuration does not necessarily work. It is not necessary to adopt the device P750. In each of the plurality of gaming machine specifications shown below, if there is no risk of significantly deteriorating the performance, it is also possible to adopt the grand prize device P750 having another structure.

Further, an example of a large winning device P750 (or a winning device related to an ordinary electric accessory) that makes it possible to win a large number of gaming balls with one opening while reducing the occupied area in the plane of the gaming area P501 of the gaming machine. The large prize device P750 as shown in FIG. 57 can be mentioned.

To briefly explain the example shown in FIG. 57, the slide plate (colored portion in the figure) and the non-winning region (non-colored portion in the figure) of the large winning device P750 are arranged side by side on a horizontal plane, and the slide plate is arranged. Further, there is a configuration in which the game ball is dropped from any of the three winning areas A to C while meandering by the partition member arranged in the non-winning area. With this configuration, the game ball flowing down the large winning device P750 flows down in the order of the winning area A, the non-winning area, the winning area B, the non-winning area, and the winning area C. It can be configured so that it takes time (distance) to finish passing through the winning area rather than flowing straight down, and the winning area of the large winning device P750 can be expanded (non-in the figure). Even in the vicinity of the winning area in the winning area, the range that can flow down to the winning area when the slide plate is opened is actually the winning area). As a result, more game balls can be rolled than when the large prize device P750, in which the game balls roll only on the slide plate with one opening, can be rolled, and more prizes can be obtained accordingly. Can be expected.

In the case of such an example, the width of the non-winning area (width in the front-back direction when viewed from the player) is about 1 to 2 game balls, and the slide plate is short-time (for example, opening operation for 0.5 seconds). Even when the opening operation is performed in, it is preferable to configure the structure so that the downstream winning area can be reached (winning is possible).

(Example of game machine specifications adopted for the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment)
Next, regarding the game machine specifications in which it is effective to use the large prize device P750 of the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, seven game machine specifications (specs, game flow, etc.) are used from FIGS. 58 to 71. Will be illustrated and explained.

In the game flow diagram shown in FIGS. 58 and 60, the black arrow indicates that the condition for transitioning to the game state to which the arrow points is "a big hit game triggered by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol". , The white arrow means "a big hit game triggered by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol". Further, the arrows hatched by diagonal lines indicate that the transition of the gaming state is triggered by "the number of lottery (missing) of special symbols has reached a predetermined number of times".

Further, as shown by arrows hatched with fine dots in FIGS. 64 and 66, there are cases where the game state changes due to a lottery for shortening the C time or a fall lottery.

It should be noted that the game flow in the embodiment shown below is a game flow intended for design purposes only, and may have a transition of a game state (not shown). As a transition of the game state (not shown), for example, in a normal game with low accuracy / low base, a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol remains (referred to as "remaining hold"), and the remaining hold is a big hit. One example is the case where the first special symbol, which is not the main body of the game, fluctuates in a high base state such as a short time and a medium time, resulting in a big hit.

FIGS. 59 and 61 describe examples of the types of hits to be mounted in the game machine specifications adopted in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment. The "big hit type" in the figure indicates the type of big hit game, and for the "symbol ratio", when a big hit is made by the Tobetsu symbol lottery, what frequency is the big hit game of the corresponding type "big hit type"? Indicates whether it will be executed in. In "Number of acquired game balls (number of rounds)", how many acquired game ball nests can be expected in the big hit game described in "Big hit type" is described, and "Big hit" is written in parentheses. It shows how many rounds of unit games are executed in the "type" jackpot game. The "game state after the big hit" describes the game state controlled after the big hit game when the big hit game described in the "big hit type" is executed.

In addition, in the figure explaining the type of hit, in the case of the specification to mount a small hit, there is a case where "hit type" etc. and "big hit" are broadly described as "hit" instead of "big hit type". However, even for the example of the gaming machine specification described as "big hit type", a small hit may be mounted if necessary.

(Game machine specifications using the grand prize device of the third embodiment 1: Feature configuration 2 of the third embodiment)
First, the first gaming machine specification (referred to as gaming machine specification 1) will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. Although the second special symbol priority digestion control is assumed for the gaming machine specification 1, other controls (first special symbol priority digestion control, inbound order digestion control, parallel control) may be adopted. ..

Further, in the gaming machine specification 1, two second starting winning openings P721 are arranged in the right side region P501R. Of these, the second start winning opening P721, which switches between the easy-to-enter state and the Hunan state, is the second starting winning opening P721A, which is related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and can be won at any time regardless of the ordinary electric accessory P770. A certain second start winning opening P721 is referred to as a second starting winning opening P721B.

<< Game Flow 1: Fig. 58 >>
As the game flow of the game machine specification 1, the game is performed in the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" as the state in which the player first plays the game (the state in which the player plays in the initialized state after clearing the ram). In the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", the player fires a game ball into the left side area P501L (see FIG. 50) of the game area P501, and the first start winning device P710 (first start winning opening P711). Aim to win a special symbol lottery for the first special symbol.

In "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", if the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the game state after the big hit is "short time (low accuracy / high base)" (in FIG. 58). It is controlled to shift to either (A) arrow) or "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" ((B) arrow in FIG. 58). Whether to shift to "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" or "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" is the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big hit game (first special symbol display device P51 stop). It is determined by the displayed first special symbol), and a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

If the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is missed in the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" for a predetermined number of times in a row, the B time reduction will be triggered and the first It is designed to shift to "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" without going through the big hit by the special symbol lottery of the special symbol (arrow (I) in FIG. 58). Regarding the operation of B time reduction, the number of special symbol lottery that triggers the operation may be counted if it is not in a high probability state, and the first execution executed during the "time reduction (low accuracy / high base)". The lottery of the special symbol or the second special symbol may also be calculated as the number of lottery related to the operating condition of the B time reduction. In addition, the "time reduction (low accuracy / high base)", which was triggered by the operation of the B time reduction, shifts to the "time reduction (low)" triggered by the big hit of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. It may be configured so that the duration is different from that of "probability / high base". It may be configured to enhance the role as a relief function by increasing the possibility of winning a big hit during "low accuracy / high base)".

"Time saving (low probability / high base)" is a low probability / high base game state until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times (when the big hit of the first special symbol is used as an opportunity). In "time saving (low accuracy / high base)", the player launches a game ball into the right area P501R of the game area P501, and the second start winning device P720 (second start winning opening P721A) related to the ordinary electric accessory P770. Alternatively, a game ball is inserted into the second start winning opening P721B, and the game is aimed at winning a big hit by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

In addition, "time saving (low probability / high base)" and "RUSH (high probability / high base)" (100 times high probability / high base game state) have the same playability, and the probability fluctuation function is activated. The big difference is that the probability state of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery differs depending on the presence or absence of. In addition, there is a difference in the production state (production mode) between "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" and the difference in the variable pattern table used in the special symbol lottery. It may be configured to exist.

When a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery in "Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" (especially in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol) (When), "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" (arrows (C) and (F) in Fig. 58) or "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" (as the game state to shift after the big hit game) In FIG. 58, it shifts to either (D) or (E) arrow). Whether it is controlled by "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" or "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" is the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (second special symbol display). The device P52 is determined by the second special symbol) displayed as stopped, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

In addition, in the case of "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)", when a big hit result is obtained in the special symbol lottery, "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" When the jackpot game that shifts to "low base)" is executed, the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game compared to the jackpot game that shifts to "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)". A specific special game with many is executed. In addition, in order to clarify the type of jackpot, the jackpot game that will shift to "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" may be referred to as "non-specific special game".

"Super RUSH (high probability / low base)" is a high probability / low base game state until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times. In "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", the player fires a game ball in the right area P501R of the game area P501, inserts the game ball into the second start winning opening P721B, and specializes in the second special symbol. It is a game that aims to win a big hit by a design lottery.

"Super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" is the same as "Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)". The game is aimed at (arrow in (G) in Fig. 58), but as a major feature, it is a big hit game related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol acquired in "Super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)". Are all special special games, and differ in that a large amount of balls (game balls to be paid out) can always be obtained.

That is, in "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" are the second triggers for executing non-specific special games. Even when the special symbol lottery result of the special symbol (the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device P52 is the symbol for starting the non-specific special game), the specific special game is executed. Therefore, those who stay in "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" with the expected number of game balls per big hit are "shorter time (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH ( It is a novel playability that it becomes larger than when staying in "high accuracy / high base)".

Here, the result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" or "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" is the result that the non-specific special game is executed. The mechanism by which (the stop display symbol of the second special symbol) results in executing a specific special game in "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" will be described.

In the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the third embodiment (game machine specification 1), a special symbol lottery is performed and the timing that results in the execution of the jackpot game (or the special symbol that triggers the execution of the jackpot game is stopped and displayed. It has a specification to change the length of the waiting time (start demo, end demo, between rounds) during the big hit game based on the gaming state staying at the above timing).

In the third embodiment (game machine specification 1), in particular, the gaming state (base state) at the start (or stop display) of the fluctuation that triggered the execution of the big hit is a high base state or a low. Depending on whether it is in the base state, a gaming machine specification is adopted in which the time between rounds of a special game (big hit game) executed based on the stop display of a special symbol that triggers the execution of a non-specific special game is different. More specifically, the special symbol (stop display symbol) that will execute the non-specific special game in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" or "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" is "super RUSH (stop display symbol)". If the stop is displayed during "High accuracy / low base)", the time between rounds is lengthened (changed from 0.5s to 6.6s), and at the start of the round, it stays on the big winning opening slide plate PP7533 of the big winning device P750. By increasing the number of game balls to be played so that the number of prizes generated immediately after the start of the round is different (increased), the number of prizes per round game (unit game) and the winning game It is possible to increase the number of balls.

In this way, when the specifications that make the time between rounds different are adopted, a plurality of prize-winning areas are provided even though the size is small like the large prize-winning device P750 of the third embodiment, and the retention due to the delay mechanism is maintained. By adopting the enhanced large winning device P750, it is expected that the number of acquired game balls that can be acquired can be greatly different between the non-specific special game and the specific special game.

Returning to the description of FIG. 58, the arrow (H) in FIG. 58 will be described.

Special symbol lottery is available for "short time (low accuracy / high base)", "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)", and "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", which are the specific gaming states of game machine specification 1. Even if a predetermined number of times (100 times in any gaming state in the example of the gaming machine specification 1) is performed, if a big hit result is not obtained, the specific gaming state is terminated and "normal time (low)". Probability / low base) ”. The reason why the number of continuations of the specific game state is set to 100 is to simplify the explanation, and the result of the special symbol lottery (the type of special symbol that is the start condition of the big hit game that triggers the transition to the specific game state). Etc.), and a different number of continuations may be configured to be configurable.

<< Type of hit 1: Fig. 59 >>
FIG. 59 is a diagram relating to the hit type of the gaming machine specification 1, which is an example of the gaming machine specifications adopted in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment.

FIG. 59 (a) exemplifies a big hit game executed when a special symbol lottery becomes a big hit in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)". Here, only the case where a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, which is the main body of the game in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", is illustrated.

In the "big hit type" in FIG. 59 (a), when the big hit game shown as "special figure 1_normal" is executed, the unit game of 3 rounds (3 times) is executed, and 10 balls are executed in each unit game. By winning the prize and generating 15 prize balls for each winning ball, a big hit game in which a total of 450 game balls can be expected to be paid out is executed. Then, after the big hit game of "Special Figure 1_Normal" is executed, the game state shifts to the "short time (low accuracy / high base)" game state (number of continuations 100 times) (corresponding to the arrow in FIG. 58 (A)). ..

In the "big hit type" in FIG. 59 (a), when the big hit game shown as "special figure 1_probability change" is executed, the unit game of 3 rounds (3 times) is executed, and 10 balls are executed in each unit game. By winning the prize and generating 15 prize balls for each winning ball, a big hit game in which a total of 450 game balls can be expected to be paid out is executed. Then, after the big hit game of "Special Figure 1_Probability Change" is executed, the game state shifts to the game state of "RUSH (high probability / high base)" (number of continuations 100 times) (corresponding to the arrow in FIG. 58 (B)). .. In the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, as shown in the "symbol ratio", the probability of being distributed to the big hit game of "special symbol 1_normal" is set as high as 95%.

FIG. 59 (b) exemplifies a big hit game executed when a special symbol lottery becomes a big hit in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)". ..

In the "big hit type" in FIG. 59 (b), when the big hit game shown as "special figure 2_super-probability change" is executed, 10 rounds (10 times) of unit games are executed, and 10 balls are won and won. By generating 15 prize balls per ball, a big hit game in which a total of 1500 game balls can be expected to be paid out is executed. Then, after the jackpot game of "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" is executed, the game state shifts to the game state of "Super RUSH (High Probability / Low Base)" (number of continuations 100 times) ((D) in FIG. 58). (E) Corresponds to the arrow). In addition, "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" is the above-mentioned "Specific Tobetsu Game", and the second special symbol is special in "Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)". When the result of the symbol lottery is a big hit, it is executed at a rate of 30%.

In the "big hit type" in FIG. 59 (b), when the big hit game shown as "special figure 2_probability change" is executed, a unit game of 10 rounds (10 times) is executed, and about 3 balls are won and a prize is won. By generating 15 prize balls per ball, a big hit game in which a total of about 500 game balls can be expected to be paid out is executed. Then, after the big hit game of "Special Figure 2_Probability Change" is executed, the game state shifts to the game state of "RUSH (high probability / high base)" (number of continuations 100 times) ((C) (F) in FIG. 58. ) Corresponds to the arrow). In addition, "special figure 2_probability change" is the above-mentioned "non-specific Tobetsu game", and the second special symbol is special in "time saving (low probability / high base)" and "RUSH (high probability / high base)". When the result of the symbol lottery is a big hit, it is executed at a rate of 70%. In "Special Figure 2_Probability Change", the expected number of winnings in each round is 3, but the number of acquired game balls is about 500, which is more than 450 balls (= 3 winnings x 15 prizes x 10 rounds). The reason is that even when the "non-specific special game" is executed, especially for the first round (first round), there is no concept of inter-round time, so the big prize of the big prize device P750 This is because there is a high possibility that about 7 to 10 game balls will stay on the mouth slide plate P7533 and a prize of about 10 balls will be generated as in "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change".

FIG. 59 (c) illustrates a big hit game executed when a special symbol lottery becomes a big hit in "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)".

During "Super RUSH (High accuracy / Low base)", the subject of the game is the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol as well as "Time saving (Low accuracy / High base)" and "RUSH (High accuracy / High base)". Therefore, the special symbols (stop display symbols) that trigger the execution of the big hit are "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", "time saving (low accuracy / high base)", and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)". It is common with.

However, in "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", as described above, a big hit game (especially a big hit game based on a special symbol that is to execute "special figure 2_probability change" which is a non-specific special game). Due to the long time between rounds, the expected number of game balls staying in the big winning opening slide plate P7533 of the big winning device P750 after the second round during the big hit game is 7 from the expected number of about 1 ball. Since the expected number of balls is increased from the ball to about 10 balls, it is possible to expect a prize of 10 balls in all round games (unit games) of 10 rounds, and it is assumed that the special symbol of the second special symbol is used. Even if the result of the lottery is a big hit that triggers the execution of "Special Figure 2_Probability Change" in "Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)", 1500 winning game balls You can expect the number.

In addition, based on winning a big hit in "Super RUSH (High accuracy / Low base)", "Special figure 2_" in "Time saving (Low accuracy / High base)" and "RUSH (High accuracy / High base)" Even if it is a big hit that triggers the execution of "probability change", by configuring it to control the game state (base state) after the big hit game to the low base state (non-ball entry easy state), "super RUSH (super RUSH) If a big hit is won during "High accuracy / Low base", it is configured to shift to "Super rush (High accuracy / Low base)" again.

For this reason, once the game state is shifted to "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", the player can acquire 1500 game balls, which is the maximum number of game balls acquired in 10 rounds, for each big hit game. It becomes possible to play in the ST (probability change of the number of times) state in which the above is repeated, and it becomes possible to play in a state where a large number of game balls can be expected to be acquired at once.

In FIG. 59 (d), there are a plurality of different game states (“super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)” in which the special symbol lottery of the same special symbol (the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol) is the main subject of the game. In a certain game state 1 and in a game state 2) which is "short time (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)", the expected degree of the number of game balls to be won per big hit is different. It shows the control contents during the jackpot game to create the game state.

"Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" is a specific special game, and is a game state 1 which is a plurality of game states ("super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", and "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH". (High accuracy / high base) ”is a big hit game in which the expected number of acquired game balls is 1500 balls in any of the game states 2). As described above, in the game state 1 which is "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", all the big hits (big hits based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol) become the "special figure 2_super probability change". In the game state 2), which is "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)", the ratio is configured to be "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" at a rate of 30%. There is. It should be noted that the ratio of 30% is "special figure 2_super-probability change", that is, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device P52 by the symbol lottery. It means that the ratio of random numbers in the symbol lottery that is "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" is 30%. For example, if the range of symbol random numbers is 1000, 300 random numbers in the range of symbol random numbers are relevant. It means that it is configured to be "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change".

When "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" is executed, the expected degree of the number of winnings per round (the real count in FIG. 59 (d) (denoted as "real C")) is 10 balls.

The opening pattern of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 basically uses a common pattern from the first round to the tenth round, as shown in the opening time (opening pattern) shown in FIG. 59 (d). In addition, after opening for 0.5 seconds once, the combination of closing for 0.5 seconds (not shown) and opening for 0.2 seconds is repeated twice, once in a total of three short opening games. A unit game (1 round) is configured.

In the large winning device P750 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, if the player continues to shoot the game ball into the right area P501R, the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 is always used. About 7 to 10 balls (basically 8 or more balls) are accumulated, and with the first opening of 0.5 seconds, the game balls on the large winning opening slide plate P7533 and 0 . A total of 7 to 10 balls + α of game balls moving to the large winning opening slide plate P7533 will be won in 5 seconds.

If 10 to 11 or more game balls win in this first opening, the operation end condition of the large winning device P750 (special electric accessory) will be satisfied, so the remaining 0.2 seconds of opening will be It is not executed, and it shifts to the control of the closing time (between rounds) described later. If 10 balls are not won in the first opening, either the remaining 0.2 seconds are opened and the opening is executed twice, or the winning of 10 game balls is generated. When the condition is satisfied, the operation end condition of the large prize device P750 (special electric accessory) is satisfied, one round game is completed, and the control of the closing time (between rounds) is started (at the final round). Moved to the state of "Big hit end demo").

In the big hit that becomes "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change", if one round game (opening time) ends and is controlled to the closing time (between rounds), until the opening time in the next round game starts. 6.6 seconds is set as the waiting time of. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, it is possible to launch about 100 gaming balls per minute (1 ball / 0.6 seconds), and the player can make a big hit of "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change". It is possible to launch 11 gaming balls toward the big winning device P750 (right area P501R) during the time between the middle rounds, and by continuing to launch the gaming balls to the right region P501R during the time between these rounds, It is possible to create a new retention of about 7 to 10 game balls on the large prize opening slide plate P7533 of the large prize device P750, and 10 game balls will be won in the next round game (unit game). You can expect it.

On the other hand, "Special Figure 2_Probability Change" shown in FIG. 59 (d) is a non-specific special game, and is a game state 2 which is "time saving (low probability / high base)" and "RUSH (high probability / high base)". It is a big hit game that is executed only in (In "Super RUSH (High accuracy / Low base)", even if the same special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is controlled by the big hit of "Special figure 2_Super probability change").

In the big hit game of "Special Figure 2_Probability Change", as described as "3c / 1 round" in "substantial C / 1R", the expectation of the number of winnings per round is about 3 balls.

The opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening slide plate P7533 of the big winning device P750 in the big hit game of "Special Figure 2_Probability Change" is the same as that of the big hit game of "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change". That is, as shown in the opening time (opening pattern) shown in FIG. 59 (d), after opening for 0.5 seconds once, closing for 0.5 seconds (not shown) and opening for 0.2 seconds. One unit game (1 round) is composed of a total of 3 short open games in which the combination is repeated twice.

On the other hand, the closing time (between rounds) of "Special Figure 2_Probability Change" is set to 0.5 seconds unlike "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change". That is, when the jackpot game of "Special Figure 2_Probability Change" is executed, when one round game (unit game) ends and the closing time (between rounds) starts, the firing interval of the game balls (1 ball) /0.6 seconds), only the closing time for whether or not one ball can be fired is set.

By controlling in this way, in the big hit game that becomes "Special Figure 2_Probability Change", the big prize device P750 is from the previously executed round game (unit game) to the current round game (unit game). While the big winning opening slide plate P7533 is closed or by the time including 0.5 seconds which is the first opening of this round, about one game ball by the position of the big winning opening slide plate P7533 Only reach can be expected, 1 ball for the first opening (0.5 seconds opening) of each round game (unit game), 1 for the remaining 0.2 seconds opening (and 0.5 seconds closing) Only the winning of each ball can be expected, and the total number of winnings is such that it is possible to win 3 balls per round in total (note that the operation of the large winning device P750 (special electric accessory) has ended. The condition is the same as in "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change", the occurrence of winning 10 balls or the passage of opening time).

The opening mode (opening pattern) of "0.5 seconds x 1 + 0.2 seconds x 2", which is the opening mode (opening pattern) of the large prize device P750 commonly used for the specific special game and the non-specific special game, is , It is an example of an opening mode (opening pattern), and is appropriately changed. The first opening is performed by increasing the number of subsequent openings (opening for 0.2 seconds in the previous example) performed after a predetermined closing time after opening for 0.5 seconds, for example, 4 times. Even if you cannot win enough in (opening for 0.5 seconds), you can expect to win 4 balls in the subsequent opening, so you missed in a specific special game (10 prizes are generated in one round). There is a merit that it can be suppressed (however, since the number of winnings increases even in non-specific special games, the difference in the expected value of the number of acquired game balls provided between the specific special game and the non-specific special game becomes smaller. There is also a demerit that it ends up).

As described above, in the gaming machine specification 1 as one of the examples of the gaming machine specifications that can be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, among a plurality of specific gaming states that are advantageous to the player. For at least one specific game state, it is possible to create a game state in which the amount of acquired game balls in a big hit game is increased as compared with other specific game states in which the main body of the game (special symbol of the main special symbol lottery) is common. It has a special effect.

The gaming machine specification 1 includes the gaming state 1 (“super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)”) and the gaming state 2 (“RUSH (high accuracy / high base)” and “time saving (low)” among the specific gaming states. In the jackpot game when a jackpot based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs, the time of the "closed time (between rounds)" is different, and the game is stagnant. By configuring the large prize device (sliding type large prize opening), which allows the game balls to win at once, the number of game balls accumulated at the start of the round game (unit game) is different, in effect. The number of game balls expected to be acquired in one round game (unit game) during a big hit game (number of acquired game balls) is configured to be different, and a special symbol lottery with the same special symbol is used for the game. The point is that in different gaming states, which are the main players, it becomes possible to bring about a result as if a special symbol lottery of another special symbol is being performed.

The gaming machine specification 1 described above is just an example, and deviates from the purpose (having a gaming state in which a jackpot with a different number of acquired gaming balls is executed in a special symbol lottery of the same special symbol). It is possible to change the playability to the extent that it does not.

For example, in "Super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", it was configured to be a big hit of "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change", but a hit of "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change 2" was provided and "Super Figure 2_Super Probability Change 2" was set after the big hit. Changes may be made such that a part (for example, 10%) of the hit distribution is provided so as to shift to "RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" instead of "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)". However, a type of jackpot that can be directly transferred to "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" as a premier jackpot from the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" will be provided. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the explanation of the gaming machine specification 1, the opening time (opening pattern) of "special figure 2_super-probability change" and "special figure 2_probability change" is configured to be the same, but for example, "time reduction (low probability / high base)". And for the jackpot that becomes "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" in "RUSH (High Accuracy / High Base)" (30% jackpot in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol), the game state 1 ("Super RUSH (High Accuracy)"・ Low base) ”) and game state 2 (“RUSH (high accuracy / high base) ”and“ time saving (low accuracy / high base) ”) for the purpose of acquiring 1500 game balls. Therefore, the opening of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 may be configured to continue to be open for 29 seconds, and further, the interval between rounds may be configured to be about 0.5 seconds.

In addition, in the explanation of the game machine specification 1, the explanation was omitted because it is not the main body of the game, but after the specific game state is completed, the lottery is performed at "normal time (low accuracy / low base)". In the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery is performed in the game state of the low base state as in the case of "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)". It may be configured so that the distribution of the jackpot type is the same as in the case of "low base)".

(Game machine specifications using the grand prize device of the third embodiment: Feature configuration 3 of the third embodiment)
Next, the second gaming machine specification (referred to as gaming machine specification 2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. Although the second special symbol priority digestion control is assumed for the gaming machine specification 2, other controls (first special symbol priority digestion control, inbound order digestion control, parallel control) may be adopted. ..

Further, in the gaming machine specification 2, the two second starting winning openings P721 are arranged in the right side region P501R. Of these, the second start winning opening P721, which switches between the easy-to-enter state and the Hunan state, is the second starting winning opening P721A, which is related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and can be won at any time regardless of the ordinary electric accessory P770. A certain second start winning opening P721 is referred to as a second starting winning opening P721B.

Further, in the gaming machine specification 2, the gaming machine specification of "V probability variation" is adopted.

<< Game Flow 2: Figure 60 >>
FIG. 60 shows the game flow of the gaming machine specification 2.

In the gaming machine specification 2, "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is set as the first gaming state after clearing the ram, and the player starts the game from the normal gaming state.

In "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", a game ball is launched into the left side area P501L of the game area P501 to generate a prize in the first start winning device P710 (first start winning opening P711). It is a game that aims to win a big hit in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol.

If a big hit is won by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", it is provided inside the big prize device P750 in a specific round ("V round") during the big hit game. When a game ball wins in the specific area P760 (V area), "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" (120 times of continuation) is set as the game state after the big hit ((in FIG. 60). B) Arrow), if no prize is awarded to the specific area P760, "short time (low accuracy / high base)" (number of continuations 100 times) is set as the game state after the big hit ((in FIG. 60). A) Arrow). Whether or not a prize is generated in the specific area P760 during the big hit game (whether or not it is easy to win if the game is performed normally) is a special symbol (stop display) that starts the big hit game. It depends on the design), and in the types of hits described later using FIG. 61, the "big hit type" is "○○ _probability change", which is a big hit game in which it is easy to win a prize in the specific area P760. On the other hand, what is "○○ _normal" indicates that it is a big hit game in which it is difficult to win a prize in the specific area P760.

In addition, in the game machine specification 2, when all the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times is missed in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" (and "short time (low accuracy / high base)"), " It has a case of shifting to "time reduction (low accuracy / high base)" (operation of "B time reduction").

"Time saving (low accuracy, high base)" means that the game ball is launched into the right area P501R (right-handed), so that the second start winning opening P721 (the second starting winning opening P721A related to the ordinary electric accessory P770) and It is a gaming state in which a prize is given to the second start winning opening P721B), which does not apply to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It should be noted that launching the game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed) is also a matter of the designer's design intention in "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" and "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" described later. It is a required gaming technique.

When a big hit game is acquired in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)", "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" ((C) arrow in FIG. 60) or "super RUSH (high)" is used as the game state after the big hit. (Probability / high base) ”(arrow (D) in FIG. 60) is set. Whether "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" or "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" is set depends on the special symbol (stop display symbol) that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. Will be decided. Although not shown, if a prize is not generated in the specific area P760 due to an unintended game method during the big hit game acquired by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, "time saving (low accuracy / high)". It has become a transition to "base)".

When a big hit game is acquired in "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", the game state after the big hit is "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" ((E) arrow in FIG. 60) or "RUSH (high)". Probability / low base) ”(arrow (F) in FIG. 60) is set. Whether "Super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" or "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" is set depends on the special symbol (stop display symbol) that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. Will be decided. Although not shown, if a prize is not generated in the specific area P760 due to an unintended game method during the big hit game acquired by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, "time saving (low accuracy / high)". It has become a transition to "base)".

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 61, but in "time saving (low probability / high base)" or "RUSH (high probability / low base)", "super RUSH (high probability / high base)" or " Regardless of whether it is controlled to "RUSH (high probability / low base)", as a big hit game, a specific special game in which the number of acquired game balls is 1500 balls and a non-specific special game in which the number of acquired game balls is about 500 balls. And are executed with a probability of 50% respectively.

If a big hit cannot be obtained in the special symbol lottery during the period controlled by "short time (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" (Base) ”(arrow (I) in FIG. 60).

"Super RUSH (high probability / high base)" is a high probability / high base game state in which the number of continuations is 120 times. If a big hit is made by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during "Super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)", all the big hits are configured to be a specific special game, and again after the big hit game. It is configured to shift to "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" (when a prize is generated in the specific area P760 during the big hit game).

In "Super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)", the number of continuations is set to 120 times, and if a big hit cannot be obtained in the 120 special symbol lottery, the operation of the probability fluctuation function ends and the operation of the probability fluctuation function ends. There is a shift to "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" (number of continuations 100 times) (arrow (H) in FIG. 60).

<< Type of hit 2: Fig. 61 >>
Subsequently, the types of hit games (type 2 of hits) in the gaming machine specification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIG. 61A shows an example of a big hit game to be executed as a result of a special symbol lottery in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)". In addition, in FIG. 61, in each game state, only the type of the winning game executed based on the lottery of the special symbol which is the subject of the game is illustrated, and the symbol which is not the subject of the game is not illustrated. .. Therefore, FIG. 61A exemplifies a jackpot game determined by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, which is the main body of the game in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)".

"Special figure 1_normal" is a big hit game that is executed at 50% of the case where a big hit is made in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" (when a big hit is made by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol). Is. In the big hit game of "Special Figure 1_Normal", the big prize opening slide plate P7533 of the big prize device P750 is opened in an open mode in which 10 prizes can be generated in one round, and 150 prize balls are played in one round. (Acquired game ball) can be obtained. The big hit game of "Special Figure 1_Normal" is composed of 3 rounds, and when the 3 round games (unit games) are completed, the big hit game is finished and it shifts to "short time (low accuracy / high base)". It has become.

In the gaming machine specification 2 adopted for the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the first round and the third round are assigned as specific rounds (V rounds) of V probability variation, and either round is assigned. If a prize (V prize) is generated in the specific area P760, the game will shift to "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" after the big hit game. Since it is difficult to generate a V prize even in a specific round of, unless an irregular situation occurs, after a big hit game, it will shift to "short time (low accuracy, high base)". There is.

"Special figure 1_probability change" is a big hit game that is executed at 50% of the case where a big hit is made in "normal time (low probability / low base)" (when a big hit is made by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol). Is. The opening mode of the large winning opening is the same as that of "Special Figure 1_Normal". The difference is that the operation mode of the specific area slide plate P7545 involved in winning the specific area P760 in the specific round is configured to be different from "Special Figure 1_normal", and when the specific round is executed during the big hit game. It is configured so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific area sensor P7546 which is the specific area P760.

Here, a method for controlling the specific area slide plate P7545 for making it easy or difficult to win a prize in the specific area P760 will be briefly described.

The specific area slide plate P7545 is instantaneously opened (for example, 0) at the start of a specific round (at the start of opening of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750) in any of the hit games. If it is a big hit game that is configured to open only .052s) and then makes it easy to win a prize in a specific area P760 that becomes "○○ _ probability change" or "○○ _ super probability change" (trigger for start of big hit). Only by detecting the winning of the first ball to the big winning device P750 for 30 seconds (or until the specific round of the big winning device P750 is completed) only (determined based on the information such as the stop display symbol) ), The specific area slide plate P7545 is configured to be displaced to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball so that the specific area P760 can be easily won.

In the example of the gaming machine specification 2, only in the case of "Special Figure 1_Normal", even if the first ball is won for the large winning device P750 in the specific round (1 round or 3 rounds), the specific area slide plate P7545 is used. By being configured so as not to be displaced to a state where it is easy to enter the ball, only when it is a hit of "Special Figure 1_Normal", depending on the normal game of a well-meaning player who does not cheat, the ball may be jammed. Except for the regular, it is configured so that the passing of the game ball (V winning) to the specific area P760 does not occur.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 61, FIG. 61 (b) will be used to explain the types of hits to be executed in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)". In addition, the hit shown in FIG. 61B exemplifies only the type of the big hit game executed by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol which is the main body of the game in the same state.

"Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" is a big hit game that is executed in 25% of the cases where a big hit is made in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)". "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" is a specific special game similar to that described in the game machine specification 1, and by executing a big hit with a long closing time (between rounds) during the big hit game, per round. By executing a big hit with the expected number of winning balls being 10, it is a big hit game in which the number of acquired game balls of 1500 balls can be expected. After the execution of "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change", the game shifts to "Super RUSH (High Probability / High Base)" which is a specific gaming state.

"Special Figure 2_Probability Change A" is a jackpot game executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is achieved in "time saving (low probability / high base)" and "RUSH (high probability / low base)". "Special Figure 2_Probability Change A" is a specific special game like "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change", and is a big hit where the number of acquired game balls of 1500 balls can be expected. It is controlled to shift to "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)".

"Special figure 2_probability change B" is a big hit game executed in 50% of the cases where a big hit is made in "time saving (low probability / high base)" and "RUSH (high probability / low base)". Unlike "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" and "Special Figure 2_Probability Change", "Special Figure 2_Probability Change B" is a non-specific special game, and by shortening the closing time (between rounds) during the big hit game, 1 The number of winnings per round is about 3 (about 10 balls in the first round), and the number of winning game balls of 500 balls can be expected through the big hit game. When "Special Figure 2_Probability Change B" is executed, the game state after the big hit is controlled to shift to the specific game state "RUSH (high probability / low base)".

In addition, in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", a part of the big hit that became "special figure 2_super probability change" (for example, symbol ratio 5%, "special figure 2_" In 20%) of "Super Probability Change", it is executed when "Special Figure 2_Probability Change A" is obtained during the big hit game and during the execution of "Super RUSH (High Probability / High Base)". The same jackpot effect as "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" that shifts during and after the jackpot game is executed and controlled to the same effect mode, and the player once obtains "Special Figure 2_Probability Change A". Therefore, it may be configured to be recognized as being controlled by "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" and then to be notified that "super RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" has been acquired.

Once the player acquires "Special Figure 2_Probability A" and recognizes that it is controlled by "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)", then "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" is acquired. When it is possible to notify that it has been done, the timing to notify that it is controlled to "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" corresponds to the apparent "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)". At the timing of the change display of the final change (120th time) of the staging mode or the 121st change display that shifts to "time saving (low accuracy / high base)", it is actually "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)". In fact, the internal state is "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" while controlling the production mode corresponding to the apparent "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)". ) ”, It may be configured to be executed by winning an effect that directly or indirectly notifies.

FIG. 61 (c) shows the types of big hit games executed when a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery in "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)". Note that FIG. 61 (c) illustrates only the jackpot game that will be executed by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, which is the main body of the game in "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)". There is. In addition, in FIG. 61, "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" is described as "ST 120 times + time saving 100 times", but the big hit shown in FIG. 61 (c) is performed during the period of ST 120 times. The jackpot game that was to be executed as a result of the special symbol lottery was shown, and the jackpot game that was to be executed in the period of 100 times of shortening time is as shown in FIG. 61 (b). Become.

In "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)", the only jackpot game to be executed is "special figure 2_super probability change". "Super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" is the same as "RUSH (high accuracy / low base)" and "time saving (low accuracy / high base)". Although it is in the game state, the big hit games to be executed are "Special Figure 2_Probability Change A" and "Special Figure 2_Probability Change B" in "RUSH (High Accuracy / Low Base)" and "Time Shortening (Low Accuracy / High Base)". Even if it is a special symbol (stop display symbol) that triggers the execution of the big hit game of, it is controlled so that "special diagram 2_super-probability change" is executed. When "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" is executed, the game always shifts to "Super RUSH (High Probability / High Base)" after the big hit game.

In the above-mentioned game machine specification 1, the low base state is set as the execution condition of "special figure 2_super-probability change", but in the game machine specification 2, the second special symbol that is to execute the big hit game is executed. It is a condition that the fluctuation related to the special symbol lottery is a fluctuation in which the high probability state and the high base state are executed (note that the gaming state is shifted to the low probability / low base state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and it is special. When the symbol (stop display symbol) is stopped and displayed, a gaming machine specification that has a high probability and is not in a high base state may be adopted).

At the bottom of FIG. 61, there is an annotation, and the big hit game is about the specific special game "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change" and "Special Figure 2_Probability Change A" and the non-specific special game "Special Figure 2_Probability Change B". An example of the time value set as the closing time (between rounds) of is shown. In the example of the game machine specification 2, in the case of a specific special game, the closing time (round) of 8 seconds is set so that the number of game balls staying in the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 is about 7 to 10 balls. On the other hand, in the case of non-specific special games, 0.5 seconds is set as the closing time (between rounds) in order to keep the number of game balls staying on the large winning opening slide plate P7533 at the start of the round game small. It is supposed to be done. Although the opening time (opening pattern) and the like are not illustrated, an opening mode substantially similar to that of the gaming machine specification 1 may be configured to be feasible.

The difference between the gaming machine specification 2 and the gaming machine specification 1 is the adoption of the V-probability variable gaming machine specification and the high probability / low base state as the gaming state (super RUSH) in which the feasibility of the specific special game increases. It differs in that it sets a high probability / high base state.

In the example of the gaming machine specification 2, when the super RUSH is set to the high probability / high base state and the transition to the "super RUSH (high probability / high base)" is performed, even after the high probability state is completed, the "time reduction" is achieved. (Low probability / high base) ”is controlled (arrow in FIG. 60 (H)), so that the player can continue to be in an advantageous state even after the end of“ Super RUSH ”. The point is that it is possible to set a pull-back period in a state where there is a high probability of returning to "super RUSH" by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

In the example of the gaming machine specification 2, as in the gaming machine specification 1, the specific special game is provided on the condition that "super RUSH" is set to the high probability / low base state and the special symbol lottery is executed in the low base state. It is possible to change to execute, but if it is configured in this way, the end condition of "super RUSH (high probability / low base)" in "super RUSH (high probability / low base)" When the special symbol lottery for the number of lottery times is executed, the game shifts to the "normal time (low probability / low base)", and the pullback period cannot be set.

Further, in the example of the gaming machine specification 2, as in the case of the modification of the gaming machine specification 1, all the big hits in the "super RUSH (high accuracy / high base)" are not set as "special figure 2_super probability change". A part of the jackpot may be configured to be "Special Figure 2_Probability Change A" or "Special Figure 2_Probability Change B".

(Game machine specifications using the grand prize device of the third embodiment: Feature configuration 4 of the third embodiment)
Next, the third gaming machine specification (referred to as gaming machine specification 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. Although the second special symbol priority digestion control is assumed for the gaming machine specification 3, other controls (first special symbol priority digestion control, inbound order digestion control, parallel control) may be adopted. ..

Further, in the gaming machine specification 3, the gaming machine specification of "small hit V" is adopted. As the performance of the "small hit V" in the gaming machine specification 3, "small hits" frequently occur due to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, that is, immediately after the transition to the easy entry state or the easy entry state. In the small hit that occurs in (the state of playing), the player will almost certainly generate a V prize by playing the assumed game (launching a game ball to the right area P501R) without playing irregular games. It has become.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the game machine specification 3 is equipped with a limiter function (“time saving limiter”), and shifts to an easy entry state (variable time shortening function, electric chew support function operating state). The big hit is executed a predetermined number of times (limit number of times) continuously without shifting to the low base gaming state (“normal time (low probability / low base)” or “remaining hold (low probability / low base)” described later). Even if it is a big hit that causes an easy-to-enter state in such a case, it is configured to control so that the easy-to-enter state is not generated after the big hit game. In the gaming machine specification 3, the limit number of time-saving limiters as a limiter function is set to "3".

<< Game Flow 3: Fig. 62 >>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a game flow in the gaming machine specification 3.

"Normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is the initial state of the gaming machine (game state after clearing the ram), and the player basically plays the game from "normal time (low accuracy / low base)". Start.

In the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", the player fires a game ball toward the left side area P501L of the game area P501 shown in FIG. 50, and the first start winning device P710 (first start winning opening P711). Aim to win a big hit by winning a prize in the game ball and drawing a special symbol for the first special symbol.

In the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", when the big hit game is executed by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, the state shifts to the "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" state after the big hit game. (Arrow (A) in FIG. 62). In addition, in the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" (which may include the states of "time reduction A", "time reduction loop", and "remaining hold" described later), a predetermined number of times ("B time reduction"). When a special symbol lottery (the number of times that is the operation start condition) is performed, the state shifts to the "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" state (arrow in FIG. 62 (H)).

In addition, "Time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" that shifts when a big hit is achieved by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and "Time saving A (short time A)" that shifts when the operation start condition of "B time saving" is satisfied. The number of continuations may be different from "low accuracy / high base)". For example, if the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is a big hit, or if the special symbol for the second special symbol in "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" described later is a big hit. In the case of a big hit (small hit V) due to a symbol lottery, the "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" that shifts after the big hit game has one special symbol lottery for the second special symbol that continues to be in an easy-to-enter state. (5 times in the case of the special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol), and the "time reduction A (low accuracy / high base)" that shifts when the operation start condition of "B time reduction" is satisfied is in an easy-to-enter state. An example is given in which the number of continuations of the second special symbol is set to 100 times in the special symbol lottery. In addition, the probability of becoming a big hit or a small hit by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the gaming machine specification 3 is about 1/3, and when the easy entry state continues 100 times, it is practically. The big hit or small hit is a definite situation (* because there is an expectation that it will be a 99.9% big hit or small hit even if the ball is easy to enter 20 times). In the following description, in the game machine specification that adopts the "small hit V" such as the game machine specification 3, when the number of times the ball is easily entered is described as "○ times", it is the main body of the game. 2 It refers to the number of continuations based on the number of special symbol lottery of special symbols, and the number of continuations based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol that is not the main body of the game, or the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. No particular description will be given regarding the number of continuations based on the total number of special symbol lottery.

In addition, as a modified example of the playability in the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" of the gaming machine specification 3, the special symbol of the first special symbol which is the main body of the game in the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" If a big hit is achieved by lottery, a hit that does not shift to "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" may be provided, or "C time saving" (special symbol) may be provided by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. It is a time-saving lottery function that creates a state where it is easy to enter the ball without executing the big hit game that is drawn by lottery, and it is also called "time-saving symbol"). The number of times may be changed to 1).

Returning to FIG. 62, the playability of "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" will be described.

The "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" state is a state in which it is easy to enter the ball, and the player launches the game ball into the right area P501R of the game area P501 to start the second operation related to the ordinary electric accessory P770. It is configured so that the winning of the winning device P720 (second starting winning opening P721) can be easily realized as compared with the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)". Therefore, the game technique required of the player is a "right-handed" game in which a game ball is launched into the right area P501R, and when the player executes the "right-handed" game, the second start winning opening P721 is entered. By winning a prize, it is relatively easy to obtain a big hit or a small hit (small hit V) by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (probability of becoming a big hit or a small hit by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol 1). It is / 3, and a big hit or a small hit is obtained with a probability of about 86% by a total of 5 lottery including 4 holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol that is consumed during the remaining holding period described later. You can do it).

If you get a big hit or a small hit (small hit V) by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)", after the big hit game, "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" ) ”(Arrow (B) in FIG. 62). The "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" state is a game state in which the number of times the ball is easy to enter is 100 times, and the "right-handed" game is performed so as to receive the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is in a gaming state in which the next big hit or small hit V can be reliably acquired. In addition, when a big hit or a small hit (small hit V) is obtained during "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)", it is a counter that counts the continuous big hits in the easy-to-enter state, and the time saving limiter is operated. It is configured to update ("+1 (increment)" or "-1 (decrement)") the value of the "time saving limiter counter" for monitoring the start timing of.

If you cannot get a big hit or a small hit (small hit V) by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)", you are in "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)". It shifts to the state of "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" which is the digestion state of the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred in FIG. 62 (arrow (E) in FIG. 62). In addition, although it is not shown because it is an irregular game, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be generated during "Time saving A (low accuracy / high base)", " After the end of the time saving A (low accuracy / high base), the transition to "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is started.

The "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" is a state in which it is easy to enter the ball (the number of continuations is 100 times), and the game technique is the same as in the "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)".

In the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)", when a big hit or a small hit (small hit V) is acquired by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol which is the main body of the game, the time saving limiter counter is updated. Then, when the operating condition of the time saving limiter function is not satisfied, it is controlled to shift to the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" again after the big hit (small hit V) game (in FIG. 62 (FIG. 62). C) Arrow), When the time saving limiter counter is updated and the operation start condition of the time saving limiter is satisfied (in the example of the gaming machine specification 3 when the result of incrementing the time saving limiter counter becomes "3"), After the big hit (small hit V) game, it is configured to shift to "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" (arrow in FIG. 62 (D)).

In addition, the time saving limiter counter shifts to the low base game state ("normal time (low accuracy / low base)" or "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)") without triggering the big hit (small hit V) game. If so, it will be initialized. In addition, the time saving limiter counter is not updated only by the big hit (small hit V) in "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" and "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)", but "normal time". (Low accuracy / low base) "Big hit based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol (big hit that shifts to" Time saving A (low accuracy / high base) ") and" Remaining hold (low accuracy / low base) " It may be updated by a big hit (small hit V). In addition, when updating the time saving limiter counter from the hit during "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" and "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" in this way, the operation start condition of "time saving limiter" By setting the value to be "4", the number of consecutive big hits (small hit V) in "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" and "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" is set to 3 times. be able to.

"Time saving loop (low accuracy, high base)" is a game that can almost certainly get a big hit (small hit V), and it is a game that you want to get a big hit (small hit V) as soon as possible. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table used for the fluctuation pattern lottery of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" period is about 0.5 seconds to 1 second in the case of a loss. A fluctuation pattern table for high-speed digestion is used, which makes it easy to select the fluctuation pattern of. If the time-saving limiter counter activates the time-saving limiter function, the easy-to-enter state is not set after the big hit (small hit V) game, so the hit fluctuation in the "time-saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" (At least in the hit fluctuation of the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" state when the time saving limiter function is activated), the maximum number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (4 pieces) A variation pattern with a variation time for storage is selected.

In addition, although it is an event that can hardly occur, even if it becomes "missing" in 100 special symbol lottery in the easy-to-enter state, it is in a low base state ("normal time (low accuracy / low base)). ”Or“ Remaining hold (low accuracy / low base) ”), even if the 100th special symbol lottery in the“ time saving loop (low accuracy / high base) ”is missed, the fluctuation for high-speed digestion It is preferable that the variation pattern for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more) is selected by using a special variation pattern table different from the pattern table.

In addition, the big hit (small hit V) generated in the "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" and the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" is executed as a specific special game, and the closing time during the big hit game ( The time between rounds) is set to a long time, and it is configured so that a large number of game balls can be acquired.

"Remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" is a non-ball entry easy state, and "time reduction A (low accuracy / high base)" or "time reduction loop (low accuracy / high base)". It is a gaming state that shifts when a predetermined transition condition (details are described above) is satisfied. The duration of the game state of "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" depends on the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the same state, and the second special symbol Continue until all the special symbol lottery of is "missing" or a big hit (small hit V) in the special symbol lottery based on either hold.

In the "remaining hold (low probability / low base)", since it is in a non-ball entry easy state (low base state), as a game state, a "left-handed" game in which a game ball is launched into the left side area P501L of the game area P501 is used. This is the recommended gaming state. In addition, when the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed in "remaining hold (low probability / low base)", there is a high probability (when there are four holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, approximately. Since a big hit (small hit V) will be obtained by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol at 80%), even if "left-handed" is recommended, the player will be "left-handed". It is structured so that it does not actively ask for games or does not ask for them at all.

If you get a big hit (small hit V) by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)", "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" after the big hit game It is controlled to shift to the gaming state of ((F) arrow in FIG. 62). In addition, if the big hit (small hit V) cannot be obtained by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)", "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" ((G) arrow in FIG. 62). In addition, since the internal game state is the same between "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" and "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", the appearance in the production (effect mode and notice of occurrence). Only changes.

If you shift from "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" to "normal time (low probability / low base)", you will get a big hit (small hit V) with a high probability based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. After shifting the production of the separate notification (recommended launch position notification), which is the notification for the player to perform the "left-handed" game, to the "normal time (low probability / low base)" , Is designed to run for a few seconds or over a number variation.

In addition, the big hit game based on the big hit (small hit V) generated in the "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" is a non-specific special game, and the closing time (between rounds) during the big hit game is long. It is configured in a short time, and the expected number of winning games per round is kept low, so that the expected number of winning game balls as a whole of the big hit game is set low.

In addition, although the game machine specification 3 assumes the second special symbol priority digestion control, by adopting the ball entry order digestion, etc., "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" (others " The special symbol lottery for the first special symbol is executed by interrupting the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol in "Time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" and "Time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)"). There is a risk of giving the player an unintended disadvantage. Therefore, when adopting other special symbol lottery methods such as ball entry order digestion, in "remaining hold (low probability / low base)", the notification recommending the "left-handed" game is not executed, or It is necessary to design a production that assumes that it will be disadvantageous to perform "left-handed" and that it is in a state where firing should be paused.

Further, since the gaming machine specification 3 is a gaming property that adopts the "small hit V", the gaming machine specification 1 and the gaming machine specification 2 and the embodiment are the same, especially when the big hit game is executed from the occurrence of the small hit. different. That is, when "small hit V" is adopted as in the game machine specification 3, the closing time (between rounds) is set after the end of the small hit game (treated as the first round of the small hit V big hit big hit game). Instead of being set, the period of "big hit start demo (combination start demo)" is set. Therefore, in order to make the specific special game different from the non-specific special game as a whole including the small hit game which becomes the small hit V, the round game during the big hit game (during the operation of the character continuous operation device) In addition to the closing time, the period of the demonstration of starting the combination operation between the first round of the big hit game (after the operation of the accessory continuous operation device) (the second round as the small hit V big hit) after the end of the small hit. Is configured to be different between a long time (for example, 8 seconds) and a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as well as the closing time during the round game during the big hit game (during the operation of the continuous accessory actuating device). Is preferable.

In addition, if you want to set the number of big hit rounds during the role-run operation start demo period, or if you want to set a period to execute the V-winning effect to surely notify the V-winning notification, hold-down continuous effect or setting suggestion effect. When you want to set up a production period for a specific production such as, etc., you can execute those productions by sharing the non-specific special game and the special special game role-up and running start demo, while the non-specific special game. In the second round of the small hit V big hit game (the first round after the operation of the bonus continuous actuating device), the same prize as in the case of the specific special game may be generated.

<< Type of hit 3: Fig. 63 >>
Subsequently, the types of jackpot games set as a result of the special symbol lottery of the gaming machine specification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. The types of jackpots shown in FIG. 63 are the minimum types of jackpot games required to realize the game flow described above in FIG. 62, and are other types unless the gist of the gaming machine specification 3 is changed. A type of hit game (big hit game, small hit game) may be set.

FIG. 63 (a) shows an example of a big hit game that occurs in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", and is a big hit game determined by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol that is the main body of the game. Indicates the type.

In the game machine specification 3, the type of jackpot that occurs in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is only "special figure 1_normal", and in the jackpot game that becomes "special figure 1_normal", 3 The round game (unit game) of the round is executed, and the opening operation (entry ball) of the large prize device P750 is performed in such a manner that 10 game balls can win the large prize device P750 in each round (for example, continuous opening for 29 seconds). Displacement operation to the easy state) is executed. Then, after the big hit game of "Special Figure 1_Normal", it is controlled to "Time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" (number of continuations once).

FIG. 63 (b) shows the jackpot game that can occur in the “time saving A (low accuracy / high base)” and the “time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)”, that is, the second special symbol drawn in the high base state. The type of big hit game to be executed when the special symbol lottery becomes a big hit or a small hit (small hit V) is shown.

In the gaming machine specification 3, the only type of jackpot that occurs in the high base state is "Special Figure 2_Super Hit". "Special figure 2_super hit" is a big hit executed as a specific special game. During the big hit game (during the small hit V big hit game in which the small hit is included as the big hit game), the closing time (during the combination operation start demo period and the round) is set to a long time (for example, 8 seconds), and the big hit game or the small hit Expectations during the round game (unit game) by retaining about 7 to 10 game balls on the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 at the start of the round game (unit game) of the winning game. It is a game of a big hit game with 10 winning balls. Although the opening mode (opening pattern) of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 is not shown, in the round game (unit game) in the specific special game of the game machine specification 3, "0. It is conceivable to adopt an opening mode (opening pattern) of "5 seconds x 1 + 0.2 seconds x 2".

In "Special Figure 2_Super Hit", 10 rounds of big hit games (10 rounds including small hit games in the case of small hit V big hits) are executed, and 1500 game balls are acquired as the number of acquired game balls. There is expected. Then, when the "special figure 2_super hit" occurs, the time saving limiter counter is updated, and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limiter counter satisfies the operating condition of the time saving limiter. The game state that shifts at the end of the "super hit" jackpot game is different.

When the value of the time saving limiter counter updated when "special figure 2_super hit" occurs is "3" (when the updating of the time saving limiter counter value is increment processing), "special figure 2_super hit" After the big hit game of ", it is controlled to shift to" remaining hold (low accuracy / low base) ". On the other hand, if the value of the time saving limiter counter updated when "special figure 2_super hit" occurs is less than "3", the "time saving loop (low accuracy / low accuracy)" is performed after the big hit game of "special figure 2_super hit". It is controlled to shift to "high base)" (number of continuations 100 times).

FIG. 63 (c) shows the types of jackpot games that occur in "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)". The period of "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" is until all the holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol remaining when the state is changed from the easy entry state to the non-easy entry state ( It is a game state that continues (until the variable display of the hold related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols is completed), and the jackpot is generated only based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

In the "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" of the gaming machine specification 3, only "special figure 2_hit" is generated. "Special figure 2_hit" is a non-specific special game, and the closing time (during the combination operation start demo period or round) is shorter (for example, 0.5 seconds) than "special figure 2_super hit". Except for the first round (and the second round of the small hit V big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls staying in the big winning opening slide plate P7533 of the big winning device P750 at the start of the round is 1. It is configured so that the number of prize balls per round is limited to about 3 (limited to the later round when the closing time is short). Therefore, the expected number of acquired game balls as a big hit game in "Special Figure 2_Hit" can be suppressed to the attitude of 500 balls.

Then, when "special figure 2_hit" occurs in "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)", after the big hit game, "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" (number of continuations once). ) Is controlled.

As described above, when the gaming machine specification 3 is adopted, a large hit (small hit V) generated based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the high base state is set as a specific special game, and a large number of gaming balls are used. On the other hand, in the big hit (small hit V) that occurs during the low base, the big hit (small hit) that occurs as the same lottery result (same stop display symbol) based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. By setting the hit V) to a non-specific special game, the number of game balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is suppressed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to acquire a large number of game balls at one time only when a big hit is obtained in a limited period of a high base game state, so that the game ball depends on the game state at the time of the big hit. It is possible to create a variation in the amount of acquisition of pachinko machines, to provide a bias of acquired game balls (mass of balls) in a specific period, and to provide a pachinko gaming machine with a game flow that gives a high degree of interest. ..

It should be noted that the purpose of the gaming machine specification 3 described above is that the time value set as the closing time during the big hit game is different depending on the gaming state, and the special special game and the non-specific special game are used. It is possible to change the design as appropriate as long as it does not change (having the result of the special symbol lottery).

For example, a part (for example, 10%) of the big hits determined by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" is provided as "special figure 2_super hit". It may be configured as follows.

(Game machine specifications using the grand prize device of the third embodiment: Feature configuration 5 of the third embodiment)
Next, a fourth gaming machine specification (referred to as a gaming machine specification 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. Although the second special symbol priority digestion control is assumed for the gaming machine specification 4, other controls (first special symbol priority digestion control, inbound order digestion control, parallel control) may be adopted. ..

The game machine specification 4 adopts the same "small hit V" game machine specification as the game machine specification 3, and the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the game machine specification 4 has the game machine specification 3. It also has a "time saving limiter" function. In the gaming machine specification 4, the limit number of time-saving limiters as a limiter function is set to "2". Further, in the gaming machine specification 4, the maximum number of holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is "2", and one special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The probability is 60% (3/5).

In addition, as a lottery result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol of the gaming machine specification 4, the winning result of "C time saving" ("time saving symbol") is obtained, and in the gaming machine specification 4, the second special symbol is obtained. When the result of the special symbol lottery for a symbol is not a big hit or a small hit, the player always wins the "C time reduction".

In the gaming machine specification 4, "C time reduction" is provided as one of the easy-to-enter states, but the easy-to-enter state of "C time reduction" is "time reduction A" or "time reduction loop". Unlike the easy-to-enter state, the extension period of the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory P770 of the second starting winning opening P721 is about 4 ms (0.004 seconds) from the normal time (low base state) due to the operation of the opening extension function. (For example, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory P770 in the low base state is 0.052 seconds sensitive, and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory P770 in "C time reduction" is 0.056 seconds. However, since it is practically difficult to win a prize in the ordinary electric accessory P770 (second start winning opening P721), it is controlled to "C time reduction" unless irregular games are played. It is assumed that there will be no new hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol during the period.

<< Game Flow 4: Figure 64 >>
FIG. 64 shows a game flow of a gaming machine specification 4 that can be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment.

The "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" in FIG. 64 is the initial state (the first gaming state after clearing the ram) of the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the gaming machine specification 4, and normally the player is " The game will be started from "normal time (low accuracy / low base)".

"Normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is a gaming state in which a "left-handed" game in which a game ball is launched toward the left side area P501L of the game area P501 shown in FIG. 50 is recommended, and the player is a game. By launching a game ball toward the left side area P501L of the area P501, the game ball is won in the first start winning device P710 (first start winning opening P711), and a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. aim.

If you win a big hit in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", you will shift to "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" (number of continuations once) ((A) in Fig. 64). Arrow). In addition, the number of times that the special symbol lottery is continuously missed in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" and other gaming states is the number of times that the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol and the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol are lost. When the total number of times reaches a predetermined number, the operating condition of "B time reduction" is satisfied, and even if a big hit is not won in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, "time reduction A (low accuracy / high base)" (1 continuation number). ((G) arrow in FIG. 64).

"Time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" is a state in which it is easy to enter the ball (the operating state of the variable time shortening function and the electric chew support function), and the player launches the game ball into the right area P501R of the game area P501. By executing the "right-handed" game, the game ball is won in the second start winning device P720 (second start winning opening P721) related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and it is easy to obtain a small hit or a big hit. 2 It is a game that causes a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbol.

Here, a slightly special process is adopted for the easy-to-enter state of the gaming machine specification 4, and the special process will be described.

The easy entry state (described as "easy entry state_time reduction A") corresponding to the "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" of the gaming machine specification 4 is a special symbol lottery for the second special symbol as an end condition. In addition to one time, the condition is that the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is performed five times, and the normal electric accessory P770 is operated three times. Further, the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is the elapse of the opening time of 6 seconds or the winning of the second starting winning opening P721 of one ball.

Summarizing these conditions, "Time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" is during the period when the normal electric accessory P770 is operated three times and the second special symbol is displayed once. , The easy entry state_time saving A will end at the timing when two new reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occur, and the variable display will occur during the period of "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)". It is configured so that the easy entry state_time reduction A ends before the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol ends (stops and displays). In addition, when the player does not consider the disadvantage of not being able to receive the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, does not operate the ordinary electric accessory P770, and does not collect two holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Even so, the easy entry state_time reduction A ends at the timing when the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that started fluctuation during the period of "time reduction A (low accuracy / high base)" ends. It has become like.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, if a big hit (small hit V) occurs during the period of "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)", it becomes a non-specific special game "special figure 2_hit" (see FIG. 65 for details). (Described later) is executed, and after the big hit game, it is controlled again to "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" (arrow in FIG. 64 (B)). On the other hand, if a big hit (small hit V) cannot be obtained during the period of "time saving A (low probability / high base)", it shifts to "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" ( (C) arrow in FIG. 64). In addition, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is not generated during the period of "time saving A (low probability / high base)", it shifts to "remaining hold (low probability / low base)". It is designed to shift to "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" without doing anything.

"Remaining hold (low probability / low base)" is a non-ball entry easy state, and the game state is the same as "normal time (low probability / low base)", and "left-handed" game is This is the recommended gaming state. However, there is a high possibility that a big hit (small hit V) will be obtained by digesting the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and a big hit (small hit V) will be obtained by digesting the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. ), Since it is controlled to shift to "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" after the big hit game (after "special figure 2_hit"), the first start winning device P710 ( The first start winning opening P711) is configured so that the separate notification effect for playing a game is not actively performed or is not performed at all.

If the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is held once in "Remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" and the big hit (small hit V) does not occur, the "C time reduction" ("time reduction symbol") is won. However, if the big hit (small hit V) is not performed after the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed once in "remaining hold (low probability / low base)", "C time reduction remaining hold (C time reduction remaining hold (small hit V)" It shifts to the "low accuracy / high base)" state (arrow in FIG. 64 (E)).

In the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, either the big hit (small hit V) or "C time reduction" is won, but the ball entry easy state_time reduction A is being executed or C time reduction is being executed. Since the inside is configured so that the C time reduction is not newly won, the result of "C time reduction" of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the execution of the ball entry easy state_time reduction A or during the C time reduction is It corresponds to "off".

"C time reduction remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)" is a ball entry easy state different from the ball entry easy state_time reduction A (hereinafter referred to as "ball entry easy state_C time reduction"). Although it is described as "C time reduction remaining hold (low accuracy, high base)", although it is said that the ball entry easy state_time reduction C is "high base state" because the opening extension function is operating as described above. As a matter of fact, the extension period of the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is about 1 interrupt (4 ms), which is a low base state for a player, "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", and "remaining hold (low)". It is almost synonymous with "probability / low base)".

Therefore, in "C time saving remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)", the second hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred during the period of "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)". The hold (last hold) is the target of the special symbol lottery in "C time saving remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)".

When the result of the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol is a big hit (small hit V) in "C time reduction remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)", it is a specific special game "special figure 2_super hit" (details). Will be described later with reference to FIG. 65), and after the big hit game, the state shifts to the "time saving loop (high accuracy / high base)" state (continuous number of times 100 times). When "Special Figure 2_Super Hit" is executed, the value of the time saving limiter counter is updated from the initial value ("+1 (increment)" or "-1 (decrement)"). On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is not a big hit (small hit V) in "C time reduction remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)", "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" It has come to move to.

The end condition of the easy entry state_C time reduction of the gaming machine specification 4 is the execution of one special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery for the first special symbol or special symbol lottery for the second special symbol), or the ordinary electric accessory P770. Is operated 10 times. The end condition (10 times) based on the number of times of operation of the ordinary electric accessory is set to the number of times that the variable display of the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol to be digested as the remaining hold does not end, and the second special The high base state is surely continued until the end of the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the symbol (arrow in FIG. 64 (I)).

For this reason, in the case of a small hit or a big hit in "C time saving remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)", it is maintained in the "high base state" at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol ends. It is a situation. In the gaming machine specification 4, when the lottery result related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit (small hit), the big hit (small hit V) is set as a specific special game or a non-specific special game. Whether or not it is determined based on the gaming state at the end of the variable display of the special symbol.

In the above-mentioned "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)", at the start of the game state, it is controlled to the "high base state" which is the execution condition of the specific special game, but the player is the second special symbol. In order to operate the ordinary electric accessory P770 in order to surely store the hold related to the special symbol lottery, the ball entry easy state_time reduction A ends at the timing when the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol ends. Even if the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is a big hit (small hit), the non-specific special game "special figure 2_hit" is executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 64, the playability in the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" will be described.

The "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" is a state in which the ball is easy to enter after the big hit game, which is "special figure 2_super hit", and is different from the easy entry state_time reduction A and the easy entry state_C time reduction. It becomes an easy-to-enter state (hereinafter referred to as "easy-to-enter state_time saving loop").

Easy entry state_time saving loop until the variation display of the 2nd special symbol (or the sum of the special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol and the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol) reaches 100 times, or the ordinary electric accessory It is an easy ball entry state that continues until the operation of P770 reaches 300 times or the occurrence of a big hit (small hit V).

In the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)", the probability of becoming a big hit (small hit V) in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is set to a high probability (60%), so the second special symbol By the time the special symbol lottery is held 100 times, you can almost certainly get a big hit (small hit V), and in the "time saving loop (low probability, high base)", you can get a big hit (small hit V). Then, "Special Figure 2_Super Hit" is executed, and by updating the value of the time saving limiter counter, the value of the time saving limiter counter becomes "2" (in the case of increment processing), the operating condition of the limiter function is satisfied, and after the big hit game. There is a shift to "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" (arrow in FIG. 64 (H)).

That is, the big hit (small hit V) during the "C time saving remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)", which is the big hit (small hit V) that shifts to the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)". Can be said to be a big hit (small hit V) performed in the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" and a "special figure 2_super hit" set twice, and "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)". If you win a big hit or a small hit at the last hold of the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred during the period of "Special Figure 2_Super Hit" (specific special game), you will get two game balls. It is a highly entertaining game that can be acquired in numbers.

<< Type of hit 4: Fig. 65 >>
FIG. 65 shows an example of a type of jackpot game carried out in a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the gaming machine specification 4. The types of jackpots shown in FIG. 65 are the minimum types of jackpot games required to realize the game flow described above in FIG. 64, and are other types unless the gist of the gaming machine specification 4 is changed. A type of hit game (big hit game, small hit game) may be set.

FIG. 65 (a) shows the types of jackpot games that occur in the “normal time (low accuracy / low base)”. Note that FIG. 65 (a) shows the types of jackpot games that can be obtained by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, which is the main body of the game.

When a big hit is made in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", "special figure 1_normal" is executed. In "Special Figure 1_Normal", the opening mode (for example, continuous opening for 29 seconds) in which the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 makes it easy to win 10 balls is executed as a round game (unit game), and the total is By executing a three-round round game (unit game), 450 game balls can be obtained as the number of acquired game balls. Then, after "Special Figure 1_Normal" is completed, the process shifts to "Time saving A (low accuracy / high base)".

FIG. 65 (b) shows the case where the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes a big hit (small hit V) in "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)" and "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)". It is a big hit game that is executed in. "Special figure 2_hit" is a non-specific special game in which the closing time (during rounds, demonstration period for starting the combination operation) of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 is as short as 0.5 seconds. At the start of the round game, about one game ball is configured to stay on the large winning opening slide plate P7533, and three balls are won in one round. As the opening operation pattern of the large winning opening slide plate P7533, an opening mode (opening pattern) of "0.5 seconds x 1 + 0.2 seconds x 2" as shown in the gaming machine specification 1 can be adopted.

When "Special Figure 2_Hit" is executed, a round game in which a prize of about 3 balls is expected to be won per round is executed for 10 rounds, and a big hit game in which a prize ball of about 500 balls can be expected to be acquired is executed. Will be done. After the execution of "Special Figure 2_Hit", it is controlled to shift to "Time saving A (low accuracy / high base)".

FIG. 65 (c) shows the types of jackpot games in "C time saving remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)" and "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)". The big hit (big hit based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol) in "C time saving remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)" and "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" is a specific special game "special figure". "2_super hit" is to be executed.

"Special Figure 2_Super Hit" is a special special game in which the closing time (during rounds, demonstration period for starting the combination operation) of the big winning opening slide plate P7533 of the big winning device P750 is as long as 8 seconds, and each round. At the start of the game, about 7 to 10 game balls are configured to stay on the large winning opening slide plate P7533, and the game progresses so that 10 balls can be expected to win in one round game (unit game). It is designed to do.

In "Special Figure 2_Super Hit", 10 rounds of round games (unit games) where 10 balls can be expected to be won per round game (unit games) are executed, and the total number of game balls of 1500 balls is expected to be acquired in the big hit games as a whole. It is a big hit that can be done.

After "Special Figure 2_Super Hit" is executed, the state after the big hit game is different depending on whether or not the value of the time saving limiter counter satisfies the operating condition of the time saving limiter function. In the example of the gaming machine specification 4, when the value of the time saving limiter counter becomes "2", that is, when "special figure 2_super hit" is performed twice in succession, the time saving limiter function is activated and "remaining hold (remaining hold). Low accuracy / low base) ”. That is, when a big hit (small hit V) occurs during the period controlled by the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" and "special figure 2_super hit" is executed, "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" Will be transferred to. On the other hand, the "special figure 2_super hit" when staying in the "C time reduction remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)" is the first big hit (small hit V) that causes an easy entry state. Since the value of the time saving limiter counter is "1", the time saving limiter function does not operate and the system shifts to the "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)".

In the example of the gaming machine specification 4 described above, the big hit (small hit V) of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the situation where the C time reduction (easy entry state_C time reduction) is operating as the gaming state is triggered. A novel game feature that is configured so that the specific special game is executed and then the specific special game is executed until the limiter function is activated (“time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)”). It will be possible to provide pachinko gaming machines with high interest.

In addition, to explain the playability of the gaming machine specification 4 in another form, among the rights of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred during the period of "time saving A (low accuracy / high base)", When a big hit (small hit V) is won in the last special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the number of balls is higher than that of the special symbol lottery based on the right of the first and second special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It can also be said that it is a pachinko gaming machine that can perform lottery as a performance.

It should be noted that the playability described as the gaming machine specification 4 is that the specific special game can be executed when the big hit (small hit V) is achieved in the high base state, and the specific special game can be executed in the low base state. Even if it is a result, it is possible to make appropriate design changes as long as the non-specific special game is executed).

For example, by changing the value of the time saving limiter counter, which is the operating condition of the time saving limiter function, to a large value such as "5", "C time saving remaining hold (low accuracy / high base)" and "time saving loop (low accuracy / high base)" There is an example of increasing the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired in the jackpot in "base)".

In addition, the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is set to "4" instead of "2", and the probability of winning "C time reduction" (time reduction symbol) in the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is set. , It may be configured to be 1/2 of "off".

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine specification 4, during the easy entry state_A time reduction and the easy entry state_C time reduction, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not win the "C time reduction" (changed to "missing"). However, if you win the "C time reduction" (the probability of winning the "C time reduction" is 1/10, etc.), you can change to the current easy entry state and easily win the new ball. By shifting to the state_C time reduction, for example, when the ball entry easy state_A time reduction is set to the continuation number of 5 times, the playability is promoted to the ball entry easy state_C time reduction (continuation number of 10 times). Alternatively, it is possible to provide a game property that extends the period of the C time reduction by newly winning the C time reduction just before the end of the C time reduction.

In addition, the lottery for "C time reduction" is configured so that it can be obtained not only as a special symbol lottery for the second special symbol but also as a lottery result for the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol. ) ”Suddenly“ C time reduction ”(ball entry easy state_C time reduction) may be adopted.

(Game machine specifications 5 using the large prize-winning device of the third embodiment: Feature configuration 6 of the third embodiment)
Next, the fifth gaming machine specification (referred to as the gaming machine specification 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. Although the second special symbol priority digestion control is assumed for the gaming machine specification 5, other controls (first special symbol priority digestion control, inbound order digestion control, parallel control) may be adopted. ..

In the gaming machine specification 5, the gaming machine specification of "small hit V" similar to that of the gaming machine specification 3 and the gaming machine specification 4 is adopted. The gaming machine specification 5 has not a limiter function but a fall lottery function for ending the easy entry state (time reduction).

The fall lottery function of the gaming machine specification 5 is strictly different from the "fall (lottery)" function described in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine.

Specifically, the "fall (lottery)" described in the explanation of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine is a lottery that ends the probability fluctuation function by lottery without going through a special game (big hit), and is a "small hit". Since the gaming machine specification 5 that adopts "V" does not have a probability fluctuation function, a small hit for ending the easy entry state (time reduction) as a fall lottery function for ending the easy entry state (time reduction). By drawing a lottery (hereinafter referred to as "falling small hit"), the easy-to-enter state can be determined by performing a process of ending the easy-to-enter state when executing the small-hit game corresponding to the "falling small hit". It is configured to end (fall from the easy-to-enter state).

In the small hit game related to the "falling small hit" of the gaming machine specification 5, it is designed so that it is difficult to acquire a game ball in the small hit game. Specifically, the big prize shown in FIG. 50 A second big prize device different from the device P750 is arranged at a predetermined position. The position of the second big winning device is, for example, below the first starting winning device P710 (first starting winning opening P711), and the "left-handed" game is placed in a position where it is easier to win, not a slide type. A small swing-opening / closing type large winning opening is configured to be arranged, and in the case of a "falling small hit", this swinging-opening / closing small large winning opening (second large winning device) is set to 0. I try to open it for about 1 second.

In this way, in the "falling small hit", it is almost difficult to acquire the game ball, so the result that the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is "missing" in the explanation in the following game flow. May include the case of "falling small hit".

<< Game Flow 5: Fig. 66 >>
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a game flow of the gaming machine specification 5.

The "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" in FIG. 66 is the initial state of the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the gaming machine specification 5 (the first gaming state after clearing the ram), and normally the player is " The game will be started from "normal time (low accuracy / low base)".

"Normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is a gaming state in which a "left-handed" game in which a game ball is launched toward the left side area P501L of the game area P501 shown in FIG. 50 is recommended, and the player is a game. By launching a game ball toward the left side area P501L of the area P501, the game ball is won in the first start winning device P710 (first start winning opening P711), and a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. aim.

If the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (big hit based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol) in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", after the big hit game is executed, "A time reduction 1 (low accuracy)"・ High base) ”(arrow in FIG. 66 (A)).

"A time reduction 1 (low accuracy / high base)" is a state in which it is easy to enter the ball (the operating state of the variable time shortening function and the electric chew support function), and the player launches the game ball into the right area P501R of the game area P501. By performing the "right-handed" game, the normal electric accessory P770 is operated, the game ball is won in the second start winning device P720 (second start winning opening P721), and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed. Aim to win big hits (small hits V). In addition, "A time reduction 1 (low accuracy / high base)" is a specific game state in which the number of continuations is one (note that the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is once, and the special symbol for the first special symbol is used. In the case of lottery, "A time reduction 1 (low accuracy / high base)" will not end until it is held 5 times).

In "A time reduction 1 (low accuracy / high base)", if the result of the special symbol lottery of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit (small hit V), after the big hit game, "A time reduction 3 (low accuracy / high base)" (High base) ”(arrow in FIG. 66 (B)). On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is missed (or "falling small hit") in "A time reduction 1 (low accuracy / high base)", it shifts to "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)". (Arrow (C) in FIG. 66).

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but in the gaming machine specification 5, when the high base state (easy entry state), a big hit (small hit V) is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. , "Special figure 2_super hit", which is a specific special game in which the closing time (between rounds, demonstration period for starting the combination operation) of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 is long, is executed, and "A time reduction" is executed. 3 (low accuracy, high base) ”. On the other hand, if a big hit (small hit V) is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the low base state (“remaining hold (low probability / low base)” described later), it becomes “special figure 2_hit”. It is now shifting to "A time reduction 2 (low accuracy / high base)" (5 times of continuation).

"A time reduction 3 (low accuracy / high base)" is a state in which it is easy to enter the ball (operation state of the fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function), and is a specific game state in which the number of continuations is 100 times. In addition, in the gaming machine specification 5, the probability that the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol will be a small hit (a small hit that becomes a "small hit V" excluding the "falling small hit") or a big hit is 1 / 7.7 (). ≈13%) is set, and when the number of continuations is 100, it is practically easy to obtain the next small hit or big hit (a state in which a small hit or a big hit is achieved at 99% or more). .. On the other hand, the probability that the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol will be a "falling small hit" is 1/22. Therefore, the ratio of the big hit (small hit V) to the "falling small hit" is about 3: 1, and in "A time reduction 3 (low accuracy / high base)", there is a probability of about 75% of the big hit (small hit). While it will be a hit V), there is a 25% chance that you will win a "falling small hit".

In "A time reduction 3 (low accuracy / high base)", if the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes a big hit (small hit V), after the big hit game, "A time reduction 3 (low accuracy / high base)" again. ((H) arrow in FIG. 66). On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is "missing" 100 times in a row during "A time reduction 3 (low accuracy / high base)", or if any of the lottery results in a "falling small hit". After the small hit game, there is a shift to "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" (arrow (I) in FIG. 66).

"Remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" is a non-ball entry easy state, "A time reduction 1 (low accuracy / high base)", "A time reduction 2 (low accuracy / high base)", "A time reduction". It is a gaming state in which a transition is made from "3 (low accuracy / high base)" according to a predetermined transition condition (execution of a specified number of special symbol lottery, winning of "falling small hit"). Although it is a non-ball entry easy state and a "left-handed" game is recommended, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes a big hit (small hit V) at a relatively high frequency, and after the big hit game, " Since it is controlled to shift to "A time reduction 2 (low accuracy / high base)" (arrow in (D) in Fig. 66), it is positive to produce a separate notification (recommended launch position notification) for "left-handed". Do not do (or do not do at all).

The probability of a big hit (small hit V) during "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" is about 42.5% when the maximum number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is four. Become. In "remaining hold (low probability / low base)", a big hit (small hit V) is given by the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that remained at the time of transition to "remaining hold (low probability / low base)". If it cannot be obtained, it will shift to "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" (arrow in FIG. 66 (E)). In addition, "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" and "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" are the same state as the internal state of the gaming machine, and the effect state (effect mode) is changed. By doing so, the player is notified that the state has changed, and a separate notification (recommended firing) that recommends a "left-handed" game for the progress of the game in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)". Position notification) The effect is configured to be displayed in a few seconds or several times of variable display.

"A time reduction 2 (low accuracy / high base)" is a state in which it is easy to enter the ball, and is a specific game state in which the number of continuations is 5 times. In "A time reduction 2 (low accuracy / high base)", if the result of the special symbol lottery of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit (small hit V), after the big hit game, "A time reduction 3 (low accuracy / high base)" (High base) ”(arrow in FIG. 66 (F)). On the other hand, in "A time reduction 2 (low accuracy / high base)", the special symbol lottery for the 2nd special symbol is missed 5 times in a row, or the special symbol lottery for any 2nd special symbol is "falling small hit". Then, it shifts to "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" (arrow in FIG. 66 (G)).

<< Type of hit 5: Fig. 67 >>
FIG. 67 shows an example of the types of big hit (small hit V) games that are executably set in the gaming machine specification 5. The types of jackpots shown in FIG. 67 are the minimum types of jackpot games required to realize the game flow described above in FIG. 66, and are other types unless the gist of the gaming machine specification 5 is changed. A type of hit game (big hit game, small hit game) may be set.

FIG. 67A shows the types of jackpot games performed in the “normal time (low accuracy / low base)”. In the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and when the jackpot is reached, the jackpot game of "special figure 1_normal" is executed.

The big hit game of "Special Figure 1_Normal" is a specification in which the big winning opening slide plate P7533 of the big winning device P750 performs a displacement operation in an opening mode (opening pattern) that makes it easy to win 10 balls (for example, continuous opening for 29 seconds). A total of 3 rounds of round games (unit games) are executed. The expected number of acquired game balls for the big hit game of "Special Figure 1_Normal" is 450 balls, and after the big hit game, the game shifts to "A time reduction 1 (low accuracy / high base)".

FIG. 67 (b) shows the easy entry state (“A time reduction 1 (low accuracy / high base)”, “A time reduction 2 (low accuracy / high base)”, and “A time reduction 3 (low accuracy / high base)” in the gaming machine specification 5. It is a figure explaining the big hit (small hit V) or "falling small hit" that may be executed when it is "probability / high base)").

"Special figure 2_super hit" is a specific special game, and the closing time (between rounds, demonstration period for starting the combination operation) of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 is set long (for example, 8 seconds). ), At the start of each round game (unit game) of the big hit (small hit V) game, about 7 to 10 game balls are configured to stay in the big winning opening slide plate P7533 of the big winning device P750. By displacementing the large winning device P750 in the opening mode (opening pattern) of three short opening times (“0.5 seconds × 1 + 0.2 seconds × 2”) as described in the gaming machine specification 1. It is configured so that 10 balls can be expected to win in each round. When "Special Figure 2_Super Hit" is executed, it can be expected to acquire a total of 1500 game balls in 10 rounds of round games (unit games), and after the big hit game, "A time reduction 3" (Low accuracy / high base) ”is controlled to shift to.

"Special figure 2_fall" is a special game (small hit game) executed when a "fall small hit" is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. As described above, since the "falling small hit" is intended to be used for the transition of the game ball (the advantageous specific gaming state, that is, the end of the easy entry state), the "falling small hit" is a game. It is designed so that you cannot expect to get a ball.

When the "falling small hit" is won, the second large winning device of the swing opening / closing type, which is not shown in FIG. 50 and is difficult to win, is opened for 0.1 seconds. When the "falling small hit" is won and the small hit game is completed, the easy entry state is configured to end, and the transition to "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" is controlled. Although not shown in FIG. 66, if there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol when the "falling small hit" is won, the "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" is used. It is designed to shift to "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" without doing anything.

In addition, if you win the "falling small hit" in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, you will be transferred to "remaining hold (low probability / low base)", but at this time, the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol will be held. Since the degree of advantage varies depending on how many such reservations exist, in order to maintain the fairness of the game, when notifying that the fall small hit has been won, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed. A special effect is to be performed to store the hold.

FIG. 67 (c) shows a jackpot (small hit V) or “small hit V” that may be executed when the player is in a non-ball entry easy state (“remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)”) in the gaming machine specification 5. It is a figure explaining "falling small hit".

"Special figure 2_hit" is a non-specific special game, and the closing time (between rounds, demonstration period for starting the combination operation) of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 is set short (for example, 0. (5 seconds), at the start of each round game (unit game) of the big hit (small hit V) game, about one game ball is configured to stay in the big winning opening slide plate P7533 of the big winning device P750. By displacementing the large winning device P750 in the opening mode (opening pattern) of three short opening times (“0.5 seconds × 1 + 0.2 seconds × 2”) as described in the gaming machine specification 1. It is configured so that you can expect to win 3 balls in each round. When "Special Figure 2_Super Hit" is executed, it can be expected to acquire about 500 game balls in 10 rounds of round games (unit games), and after the big hit game, "A time reduction 2" (Low accuracy / high base) ”is controlled to shift to.

"Special figure 2_fall" is a special game (small hit game) executed when a "fall small hit" is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Even if you win the "falling small hit" during the "remaining hold (low probability / low base)" period, it is not easy to enter the ball, so you cannot get the game ball corresponding to the "falling small hit". Except for the hit game being executed, almost the same game progress (and almost the same production) as "off" is performed.

After the small hit game related to "Special Figure 2_Fall" is completed, if there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it will shift to "Remaining hold (low probability / low base)" again. If there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol, it will shift to "normal time (low accuracy / low base)". In addition, "remaining hold (low accuracy / low base)" and "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" are the same as the game state (low accuracy / low base state), and are the same as the effect state (effect mode). Only the subject of the game (mainly the type of special symbol displayed as the effect) is different, and the "transition" here means a change in the effect state.

In the gaming machine specification 5 described above, when the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes a big hit (small hit V) in the high base state (easy entry state), the number of acquired gaming balls is large, which is a more advantageous game. While a specific special game that shifts to the state is executed, if a big hit (small hit V) is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the low base state, the result of the same special symbol lottery Even if it is (stop display symbol), the number of acquired game balls is small, and it will transition to a more disadvantageous game state after the big hit game than when the big hit (small hit V) is won in the high base state (easy entry state). By being configured, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine having a gaming machine specification that realizes different profits from the same lottery result depending on the gaming state.

The game flow 5 and the hit type 5 described in the game machine specification 5 are merely examples, and the essential part thereof (even if the result of the special symbol lottery is the same depending on the game state, is not the specific special game). A change may be made as appropriate within the range in which a different jackpot game is executed in the specific special game and the game is distributed to different advantageous gaming states after the jackpot game).

The game machine specifications 1 to the game machine specifications 5 have been described above. As a common point of these game machine specifications, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is the same depending on the game state, the specific special game and the non-specific special game are used. By making the special game executed different from that of the game, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine having a different game state in which the number of acquired game balls and the game state distributed after the special game are different. In the game machine specifications 1 to the game machine specifications 5, different game flows and hit types have been described as examples, but as long as the essential part is not changed, a part of the game machine specifications described in each is described. It can be used in combination.

Further, in the gaming machine specifications 6 and the gaming machine specifications 7 shown below, even if there is no specification for distributing the specific special game and the non-specific special game, it is adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment. An effective gaming machine specification using the large prize-winning device P750 will be described. Of course, the concepts of the specific special game and the non-specific special game can be adopted in the game machine specifications 6 and the game machine specifications 7, and the game machines disclosed below in the game machine specifications 1 to the game machine specifications 5 already described. It should be added that the feature points in the specifications 6 and the gaming machine specifications 7 can be adopted without changing the essential parts thereof.

(Game machine specifications using the grand prize device of the third embodiment 6: Feature configuration of the third embodiment 7)
Next, the sixth gaming machine specification (referred to as gaming machine specification 6) will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. For the gaming machine specification 6, parallel control is assumed as a control method for the special symbol lottery.

In the gaming machine specification 6, a game property called "small hit rush" is adopted.

The game nature of "small hit rush" is a specific game state (called "small hit rush") in which a small hit is won with a high probability in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. In the game state), it is a game property that aims at a big hit while acquiring an acquired game ball (ball output) by acquiring a small hit, and it is easily controlled by being controlled to a specific game state (small hit rush). It is a game specification that you can receive a big hit lottery while acquiring a game ball.

In the gaming machine specification 6, "super probability variation (high probability / low base)" is in a gaming state corresponding to a small hit rush, and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is, for example, a big hit during the operation period of the probability fluctuation function. The small hit is won with a probability of 1/27.5, which is a higher probability than the probability of 1/250.

In addition, when the small hit rush is adopted, if the launch position of the game ball is switched every time the small hit is won, the game becomes complicated and there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to acquire the game ball in the small hit. The recommended firing position during the small hit rush is configured to be the same as the placement direction of the big winning device P750, and a "right-handed" game is recommended during the small hit rush.

In addition, the "right-handed" game is a so-called time saving ("time saving (low accuracy / high base)" in the gaming machine specification 6), which is another specific gaming state, or "probability change (high accuracy / high accuracy) in the gaming machine specification 6". It is often the recommended gaming method even in the state of "high base)", and in these states, a mechanism is required to make it difficult to acquire a gaming ball based on a small hit game.

In a specific gaming state where a "right-handed" game other than the small hit rush is recommended, as a mechanism that makes it difficult to acquire a game ball based on the small hit game, the main body of the game in the specific game other than the small hit rush is the small hit. Special symbols that have a low winning probability or do not win small hits (the first special symbol in game machine specification 6), and in the lottery of special symbols that may win small hits, be sure to take a long time (4 minutes, etc.) The normal electric accessory P770 and the ordinary electric accessory P770, which are configured so that the fluctuation time of the above is selected, and other specific gaming states are always set to the high base state and are arranged upstream from the grand prize device P750. An example of making it difficult for a pachinko ball to flow down to the large winning device P750 by moving the pachinko ball into the winning slot (in this example, since the "small hit rush" is in a low base state, the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is shortened. , The game ball is easy to flow down toward the big prize device P750).

In the game machine specification 6, in a specific gaming state other than the small hit rush, as a configuration for making it difficult to acquire a game ball based on the small hit game, the right area P501R of the game area P501 is located upstream of the large winning device P750. The first start winning opening P711 related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is arranged at the same position, and the second starting winning opening P721 not related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is arranged. In "Probability change (high probability / high base)", the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is the main game, while the long-term fluctuation pattern is selected even when the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed. By configuring so as to be performed, it is configured to avoid the acquisition of a game ball based on a small hit game in a specific game state other than the small hit rush.

<< Game Flow 6: Figure 68 >>
FIG. 68 shows a game flow of the gaming machine specification 6 adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment.

The "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" in FIG. 68 is the initial state of the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the gaming machine specification 6 (the first gaming state after clearing the ram), and normally the player is " The game will be started from "normal time (low accuracy / low base)".

"Normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is a gaming state in which a "left-handed" game in which a game ball is launched toward the left side area P501L of the game area P501 shown in FIG. 50 is recommended, and the player is a game. By launching a game ball toward the left side area P501L of the area P501, the game ball is won in the first start winning device P710 (first start winning opening P711), and a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. aim.

When the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (big hit based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol) in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", the big hit game is started (stop display). After the big hit game is executed by the symbol), the "time reduction (low accuracy / high base)" (arrow in FIG. 68 (A)) or the "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" (arrow in FIG. 68 (B)) It is distributed to either.

"Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" is a specific game state, and is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. As mentioned above, the gaming machine specification 6 adopts the playability that "super-probability (high-accuracy / low-base)" is "small hit rush", so "time saving (low-accuracy / high-base)" is included. Although the ball is easy to play and the "right-handed" game is recommended, the starting prize opening for the ordinary electric accessory P770 is the first starting winning opening P711, and the main body of the game is the first. It is a special symbol lottery for special symbols. The second start winning opening P721 is also arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501, but when the first starting winning opening P711 related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is arranged upstream and is in a high base state. Is configured to win almost all game balls in the first start winning opening P711, so in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" described later. Winning is rarely generated.

If you win the big hit lottery with "short time (low accuracy, high base)", the big hit game will be based on the lottery result (stop display symbol) of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol that will start the big hit game. Later, the game state shifts to either "super-probability (high-probability / low-base)" (arrow in FIG. 68 (D)) or "time saving (low-probability / high-base)" (arrow in FIG. 68 (C)). It has become like.

In addition, the number of continuations of "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" is 250 times, but if the jackpot game cannot be obtained as a result of 250 special symbol lottery, "normal time (low accuracy / low accuracy)"・ Low base) ”(arrow in FIG. 68 (E)).

"Probability change (high accuracy / high base)" is a specific game state, and is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The game method is the same as "time saving (low accuracy / high base)", and there are two differences.

The first difference is that the probability that the probability fluctuation function is activated, that is, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is set to a higher probability than "time saving (low probability / high base)". ..

The second difference, which will be explained in detail in FIG. 69, is a part of the shift from "super-probability (high-probability / low-base)" to "probability (high-probability / high-base)". In the "probability change (high probability / high base)" game that is executed after the big hit game, the easy entry state ends by executing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery, and the high base state changes to the low base state. It is a point that it may shift to "super-probability change (high-probability / low-base)" without going through a big hit (arrow in FIG. 68 (L)).

If you win the big hit lottery with "probability change (high probability, high base)", the big hit game will be based on the lottery result (stop display symbol) of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol that will start the big hit game. Later, the game state shifts to either "super-probability (high-probability / low-base)" (arrow in FIG. 68 (G)) or "time saving (low-probability / high-base)" (arrow in FIG. 68 (F)). It has become like.

In addition, the number of continuations of "probability change (high probability / high base)" is 250 times, but if the jackpot game cannot be obtained as a result of 250 special symbol lottery, "normal time (low probability)"・ Low base) ”(arrow in FIG. 68 (H)).

The "super-probability change (high-probability / low-base)" is a specific game state (probability fluctuation function, operation state of the second special symbol inter-change shortening function) in which the ball is easily entered. "Ultra-probability (high-probability / low-base)" is a low-base state and the electric chew support function is not operating, so there is almost no prize in the first start winning opening P711 related to the ordinary electric accessory P770. By winning a prize in the second starting winning opening P721 located downstream from the first starting winning opening P711 related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be received with high frequency. It has become.

And, in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, since it is configured to win a small hit with a higher probability (1 / 27.5) than when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, "super probability change". (High probability / low base) "is a so-called" small hit rush "that allows you to aim for a big hit while increasing the number of game balls in a small hit game.

Here, in the large prize device P750 adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, about 7 to 10 game balls are retained in the large prize opening slide plate P7533, and a large amount of prizes are won by opening in a short time. Since the structure of the large winning device P750 that can generate the above is adopted, the opening mode of the small hit game (for example, "0.5 seconds x 1 + 0.2 seconds x 2" adopted in the game machine specification 1). Even in the displacement operation of the large winning opening slide plate P7533 in the opening mode (opening pattern), it is possible to expect a prize in the large winning device P750 of 10 balls with one small hit game.

That is, in the example of the gaming machine specification 6, every time a small hit is won with a probability of 1 / 27.5 by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit game is equivalent to one round of the big hit game. A prize (a prize for a large prize device P750 of 10 balls) and a prize ball (150 balls) can be expected.

Since the number of continuations of "Super Probability (High Probability / Low Base)" is set to 250 times, even if a big hit cannot be obtained in 250 special symbol lottery, a small hit will be 8 to 10 times. It is expected to be acquired about once, and it is configured so that it is possible to acquire about 1200 to 1500 game balls by a small hit game during the period of "super probability change (high accuracy / low base)". In addition, the small hit probability is 1 / 27.5, and by suppressing the winning expectation of small hits in 250 special symbol lottery to 10 or less, small in "super probability change (high probability / low base)" It is designed so that the total expected number of acquired game balls in the hit game does not exceed the maximum number of acquired game balls (1500 balls / 10 rounds) of the big hit game of the game machine specification 6, and the acquisition of small hits is the game. I try not to be the main purpose.

Returning to the description of the game flow 6 of FIG. 68, the progress of the game from the “super-probability variation (high-probability / low-base)” will be described.

In "Super Probability (High Probability / Low Base)", when the big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol, the lottery result (stop) of the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol that will start the big hit. Depending on the display symbol), either "super probability change (high accuracy / low base)" (arrow in FIG. 68 (I)) or "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" (arrow in FIG. 68 (J)) after the big hit game. It is sorted into crabs. As mentioned above, a part of the transition from "super-probability (high-probability / low-base)" to "probability (high-probability / high-base)" (winning type "Special Figure 2_super-probability (promotion)" was won. In the case of (high probability / high base), by executing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery in "probability change (high probability / high base)", it is possible to return to "super probability change (high probability / low base)" without going through a big hit. have.

In addition, in "super-probability change (high-probability / low-base)", if a big hit cannot be obtained in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol with 250 continuations, "normal time (low-probability / low-base)". It is controlled to shift to ((K) arrow in FIG. 68).

<< Type of hit 6: Fig. 69 >>
FIG. 69 shows an example of the types of special games (big hit, small hit) that are set to be executable in the gaming machine specification 5. The types of jackpots shown in FIG. 69 are the minimum types of jackpot games required to realize the game flow described above in FIG. 68, and are other types unless the gist of the gaming machine specification 6 is changed. A type of hit game (big hit game, small hit game) may be set.

FIG. 69A shows the types of jackpot games in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", and is a jackpot game executed by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol.

"Special figure 1_probability change" is a type of big hit selected with a probability of 50% when the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit. During the big hit game, the big winning device P750 performs a displacement operation in an opening mode (for example, continuous opening for 29 seconds) that makes it easy to win 10 balls, and a total of 5 rounds of round games (unit games) are executed. The number of game balls acquired for 750 balls can be expected. After the big hit game, the game shifts to "probability change (high probability / high base)" (number of continuations 250 times).

"Special figure 1_normal" is a type of big hit selected with a probability of 50% when the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit. During the big hit game, the big winning device P750 performs a displacement operation in an opening mode (for example, continuous opening for 29 seconds) that makes it easy to win 10 balls, and a total of 5 rounds of round games (unit games) are executed. The number of game balls acquired for 750 balls can be expected. After the big hit game, the game shifts to "shorter working hours (low accuracy / high base)" (250 consecutive times).

FIG. 69 (b) is a big hit obtained by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol which is the main body of the game in the game state of "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "probability change (high accuracy / high base)". Shows the type of game. In addition, in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "probability change (high accuracy / high base)", the same special symbol lottery of the first special symbol as in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is executed. Therefore, the type of jackpot game to be acquired is the same as "normal time (low accuracy / low base)".

However, when "Special Figure 1_Probability Change" is executed as a result of the special symbol lottery executed in "Time saving (low probability / high base)" and "Probability change (high probability / high base)". After the big hit game, the number of times the electric chew support function is operated is 0 times (when "Special Figure 1_Probability change" is set in "normal time (low probability / low base)", the number of times the electric chew support function is operated is 250. It is configured to be (times), and after the big hit game, it shifts to "super-probability change (high-probability / low-base)".

If "Special Figure 1_Normal" is to be performed as a big hit game in "Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "Probability change (high accuracy / high base)", "normal time (low accuracy / high base)"・ Low base) ”is the same control.

FIG. 69 (c) shows the types of winning games executed as a result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the “super probability variation (high accuracy / low base)”.

"Special figure 2_super-probability change" is a big hit game executed at 30% when a big hit is selected as a result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. In "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change", the large winning device P750 performs a displacement operation in an open mode (for example, continuous opening for 29 seconds) that makes it easy to win 10 balls, and a round game (unit game) of 10 rounds is executed. By doing so, it is a big hit game in which the number of acquired game balls of 1500 balls can be expected. Then, after the big hit game, it is controlled again to "Special Figure 2_Super Probability Change".

"Special figure 2_probability change" is a big hit game executed in 40% of the case where a big hit is executed as a result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. During the big hit game, the big winning device P750 performs a displacement operation in an opening mode (for example, continuous opening for 29 seconds) that makes it easy to win 10 balls, and a total of 5 rounds of round games (unit games) are executed. The number of game balls acquired for 750 balls can be expected. After the big hit game, the game shifts to "probability change (high probability / high base)" (number of continuations 250 times).

"Special figure 2_probability change (promotion)" is a big hit game executed at 30% when a big hit is executed as a result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. During the big hit game, the big winning device P750 performs a displacement operation in an opening mode (for example, continuous opening for 29 seconds) that makes it easy to win 10 balls, and a total of 5 rounds of round games (unit games) are executed. The number of game balls acquired for 750 balls can be expected. After the big hit game, the game shifts to "probability change (high probability / high base)" (number of continuations 250 times).

In addition, "special figure 2_probability change (promotion)" is the number of operations of the ball entry easy state (electric chew support function) among the specific game states set as "probability change (high probability / high base)" after the big hit game. However, it is configured to be different from the type of jackpot that will shift to other "probability changes (high probability / high base)" such as "special figure 2_probability change".

More specifically, in the case of "Special Figure 1_Probability Change" or "Special Figure 2_Probability Change", the number of operations in the easy entry state (electric chew support function) is 250, which is the same as the number of operations of the probability fluctuation function. By setting the number of times, the activation of the probability fluctuation function and the end time of the easy entry state are configured to be the same, while in the case of "Special Figure 2_Probability change (promotion)", the entry is made. "Special figure 2_probability change (promotion)" was executed by setting the number of operations of the easy state (electric chew support function) to 50 or 100 times according to the result of the special symbol lottery (stop display symbol). After the special symbol lottery was performed 50 or 100 times in the "probability change (high probability / high base)" that was later transferred, the probability fluctuation function continued to operate, but the easy entry state ended and the low base state was reached. It is configured so that the game state changes to "super-probability change (high-probability / low-base)" by shifting.

In addition, the end condition of the easy entry state set in "Special Figure 2_Probability Change (Promotion)" is such that 50 times and 100 times are selected in half (50%), and the second special. 15% of the cases where a big hit is made by the special symbol lottery of the symbol, "Special Figure 2_Probability change (promotion)" where the end condition of the easy entry state is 50 times and the end condition of the easy entry state is 100 times It is assigned to each of "Special Figure 2_Probability Change (Promotion)". In addition, when the end condition of the easy entry state is 50 times, the number of continuations of "super probability change (high accuracy / low base)" shifted from "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" is 200 times (250 times-). 50 times).

"Special figure 2_small hit" indicates a small hit game executed when the result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is "small hit". In the small hit game, the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 operates in "0.5 seconds x 1 + 0.2 seconds x 2" adopted in the gaming machine specification 1 or the like as the opening mode (opening pattern). As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the big prize device P750 of 10 balls by opening a total of 3 times or less, and it is configured so that the game balls for one round of big hit games (150 balls) can be acquired. ing.

When the small hit game corresponding to "Special Figure 2_Small Hit" is executed, the game state after the small hit game depends on the execution timing of the special symbol lottery for executing the small hit game. If a small hit is won in the 250th special symbol lottery, which is the end timing of "super probability change (high probability / low base)", the game shifts to "normal time (low probability / low base)" after the small hit game. On the other hand, if a small hit is won at the timing of a special symbol lottery less than 250 times, it is designed to return from the state of continuation to "super probability change (high accuracy / low base)".

According to the gaming machine specification 6 described above, in the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the small hit rush, by adopting the large winning device P750 adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, one small hit game is performed. It is configured so that it is possible to acquire a game ball equivalent to one big hit game by execution, and it has become possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine with a highly entertaining small hit rush game that has increased the value of one small hit. ing.

In the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the conventional small hit rush, the number of game balls that can be won in the small hit game is about 4 or 5 balls at most, and the average is about 1 or 2 balls. It was a game that gradually increased the number of game balls by setting it as high as 1/3, but the large prize device P750 adopted for the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment was adopted, and the game machine specification 6 In the case of a small hit rush configured as described above, the small hit probability is lower than that of the conventional technique, but the prize ball per one time is equivalent to about one round of big hits, and the small hits are continuous. It is a specification that allows you to enjoy even more time between balls when it becomes a problem.

The game flow 6 and the hit type 6 disclosed in the gaming machine specification 6 are merely examples, and the structure of the large winning device P750 that can generate a winning of 10 game balls during the small hit game is adopted. It is possible to change the design as appropriate without changing the pachinko game machine.

For example, in the gaming machine specification 6, the main players of the "short time (low accuracy / high base)" and "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" games are the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. By setting the starting winning opening related to P770 to the second starting winning opening P721, the subject of the game in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" is the special of the second special symbol. It may be configured to be a symbol lottery. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, small hits frequently occur in "time reduction (low accuracy / high base)" and "probability change (high accuracy / high base)", so the opening pattern in the small hit game is shortened. Temporary period (small hit game) of special symbol lottery of "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" as time (for example, "0.2 seconds x 1") The period) may be shortened.

If such a change is made, only 7 to 10 game balls (about 8 on average) staying on the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 will be dropped in one small hit game. However, it can be configured to increase the value of each small hit compared to the conventional small hit rush model.

(Game machine specifications using the large prize-winning device of the third embodiment 7: Feature configuration 8 of the third embodiment)
Next, the seventh gaming machine specification (referred to as gaming machine specification 6) will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. Regarding the game machine specification 7, the second special symbol priority digestion control is assumed as the control method of the special symbol lottery, but other controls (first special symbol priority digestion control, inbound order digestion control, parallel control) are adopted. It may be something to do.

<< Game Flow 7: Fig. 70 >>
FIG. 70 shows the game flow of the gaming machine specification 7 adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment.

The "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" in FIG. 70 is the initial state of the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the gaming machine specification 7 (the first gaming state after clearing the ram). The game will be started from "normal time (low accuracy / low base)".

"Normal time (low accuracy / low base)" is a gaming state in which a "left-handed" game in which a game ball is launched toward the left side area P501L of the game area P501 shown in FIG. 50 is recommended, and the player is a game. By launching a game ball toward the left side area P501L of the area P501, the game ball is won in the first start winning device P710 (first start winning opening P711), and a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. aim.

When the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (big hit based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol) in "normal time (low accuracy / low base)", the big hit game is started (stop display). After the big hit game is executed by the symbol), the "time reduction (low accuracy / high base)" (arrow in FIG. 70 (A)) or the "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" (arrow in FIG. 70 (B)) It is distributed to either.

In the gaming machine specification 7, the number of continuations of "time reduction (low accuracy / high base)" is the type of big hit game that triggered the shift to "time reduction (low accuracy / high base)" (the start of big hit). The number of games is set differently depending on the type of special symbol), and the number of easy-to-enter balls that can be set as "short time (low accuracy / high base)" is 100, 200, or 300. It is one of 10,000 times. On the other hand, the number of continuations of "probability change (high probability / high base)" is controlled to 64 times regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It has become.

The "time reduction (low accuracy / high base)" is a state in which it is easy to enter the ball (the operating state of the variable time shortening function and the electric chew support function), and the player fires the game ball in the right area P501R of the game area P501. By executing the "right-handed" game, the game ball is won in the second start winning device P720 (second start winning opening P721) related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed in the game. It is a game that aims to win a big hit as a subject.

The details of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol will be described later, but all types of hits are big hits that trigger the transition to "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" (number of continuations 64 times). If a big hit is made in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during "time saving (low accuracy / high base)", it will shift to "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" (Fig.) (C) arrow in 70). On the other hand, if a big hit cannot be obtained in the special symbol lottery during the "short time (low accuracy / high base)", the system shifts to the "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" (Fig. 70). Middle (D) arrow).

The "probability change (high probability / high base)" is a state in which the ball is easy to enter and the probability fluctuation function is activated, and is a gaming state in which the duration is 64 times, which is a so-called 64 times ST period.

In "Probability change (high accuracy / high base)", if a big hit is made in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it will be controlled to "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" again after the big hit game. (Arrow (E) in Fig. 70), and if a big hit cannot be obtained by special symbol lottery during "Probability change (high accuracy / high base)", "normal time (low accuracy / low base)" ((F) arrow in FIG. 70).

The feature of "Probability change (high probability / high base)" of the game machine specification 7 is that the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery is set to 1 / 25.8, which is a high probability, and the probability of winning the jackpot during the ST period ( The feature is that it is a high-continuity ST machine with a high continuation rate of about 92%, and the fluctuation determined by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in "probability change (high probability / high base)". It is easy to select a pattern for a short time such as 0.5 seconds or 1 second, and the pattern is configured to be capable of executing 40 fluctuations per minute on average. In addition, the fluctuation that becomes a big hit also has a fluctuation time of about 5 seconds (1 minute at the longest, etc.) in order to notify that it will be a big hit immediately, and the next big hit game will occur after the big hit game is completed. The feature is that the interval between them is very short.

In this way, in the "probability change (high probability / high base)", the game is controlled so that the game progresses in a short time (high speed), so that the player keeps firing the game ball into the right area P501R of the game area P501. Even if it is, the number of wasted game balls is suppressed to a small amount, and the game balls are continuously fired, so that it is possible to create a situation in which the game balls are retained in the large prize opening slide plate P7533 of the large prize device P750. At the start of the first round immediately after the start of the big hit, a large number of game balls fall at once, and it is possible to shorten the digestion time of the first round of the big hit game.

As described above, in the game machine specification 7, the game progresses in a short time (high speed) by using the big prize device P750 adopted in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment. By shortening and smoothly configuring the machine, it has the effect of providing a comfortable and stress-free gaming machine to the player.

<< Type of hit 7: Fig. 71 >>
FIG. 71 shows an example of the types of jackpot games that are set to be executable in the gaming machine specification 7. The types of jackpots shown in FIG. 71 are the minimum types of jackpot games required to realize the game flow described above in FIG. 70, and are other types unless the gist of the gaming machine specification 7 is changed. A type of hit game (big hit game, small hit game) may be set.

FIG. 71 (a) shows the types of jackpot games obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the “normal time (low accuracy / low base)”.

In addition, in the gaming machine specification 7, all of the big hit games "Special Figure 1_Probability Change 1", "Special Figure 1_Normal 1" to "Special Figure 1_Normal 4" obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. It is a three-round jackpot, and the other controls are the same except that the gaming state after the jackpot game is different.

In "Special Figure 1_Probability Change 1", "Special Figure 1_Normal 1" to "Special Figure 1_Normal 4", a total of 3 rounds of round games (unit games) are executed, and 10 balls are expected to be won in each round game. It is a big hit game. In the game machine specification 7, the number of prize balls of the large prize device P750 is 10 balls / 1 prize, and the number of game balls to be acquired is 100 balls (10 prize balls × 10 prizes) per round.

As for the game state after each big hit of "Special Figure 1_Probability Change 1" and "Special Figure 1_Normal 1" to "Special Figure 1_Normal 4", "Special Figure 1_Probability Change 1" is "Probability Change (High Probability / High Base)" (Continued 64 times), "Special Figure 1_Normal 1" is "Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" (Continued 10000 times), "Special Figure 1_Normal 2" is "Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" (Continued 100 times), "Special Figure 1_Normal 3" is "Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" (Continued 200 times), "Special Figure 1_Normal 4" is "Time saving (low accuracy / high base)" "(The number of continuations is 300).

FIG. 71 (b) shows the types of jackpot games in the “time saving (low accuracy / high base)” and “probability variation (high accuracy / high base)” of the gaming machine specification 7, and is the second special symbol that is the main body of the game. The type of jackpot game to be executed in the special symbol lottery of.

The big hit games in "time saving (low accuracy / high base)" and "probability change (high accuracy / high base)" are all composed of probability change hits that will shift to "probability change (high accuracy / high base)". The difference between the types of jackpots is the number of round games (unit games) executed as jackpot games.

Specifically, "Special Figure 2_Probability Change 1" is a big hit of 10 rounds, "Special Figure 2_Probability Change 2" is 4 rounds, "Special Figure 2_Probability Change 3" is 3 rounds, and "Special Figure 2_Probability Change 4" is It is a big hit for two rounds. The number of acquired game balls expected in each big hit game is 1000 balls for "Special Figure 2_Probability Change 1", 400 balls for "Special Figure 2_Probability Change 2", 300 balls for "Special Figure 2_Probability Change 3", and "Special Figure 2_". Probability change 4 "is 200 balls.

According to the gaming machine specification 7 described above, high-speed digestion is performed in a gaming state having a high-speed digestion gaming state (“probability variation (high accuracy / high base)”) in which a short-time fluctuation pattern is frequently selected. By taking the mode of continuously firing the game ball in order to digest the game state, the game ball can be awarded to the big prize device P750 at once in the first round, which is the start of the big hit, and the time of the big hit game can be shortened. It is possible to provide a game ball that can be configured.

The game flow 7 and the hit type 7 shown in the gaming machine specification 7 are examples, and the game playability can be appropriately changed without changing the essential portion thereof. For example, "short time (low probability / high base)" (10000 times of continuation) is controlled to a specific gaming state as compared with "probability change (high probability / high base)" (64 times of continuation). While it is configured with a high probability of being able to win a big hit, the jackpot probability is set as low as 1/256, so a part of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is "short time (low accuracy). By including a big hit that becomes "high base)" (number of continuations 10,000 times), it may be configured to prevent a large number of big hits from occurring in a short time and a large number of game balls being acquired. In addition, "short time (low probability / high base)" (10000 times of continuation) can win a big hit with higher probability than "probability change (high probability / high base)" (64 times of continuation). Because of this (because it is in a state where a big hit can be obtained almost certainly), there is almost no risk of suffering a disadvantage (the specific game state ends without winning a big hit) as a player.

(Production that can be adopted for the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment and other gaming machine specifications)
Subsequently, some specifications of the gaming machines that can be adopted in combination with respect to the above-mentioned gaming machines from the gaming machine specifications 1 to the gaming machine specifications 7 will be described.

<< Launch instruction production >>
When the special game (big hit, small hit) is advanced by using the large winning device P750 adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the opening mode shown in the specific special game such as the gaming machine specification 1 (the opening mode). In the case of an opening mode (opening pattern) in which short opening is repeated a plurality of times, such as "0.5 seconds x 1 + 0.2 seconds x 2", which is an opening pattern), the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 It is necessary to keep the game ball as much as possible on the large winning opening slide plate P7533 before the first opening operation (displacement operation) is performed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the player is fired at the game ball large prize device P750, which is necessary for the progress of the special game so that the game progresses according to the intended design specifications. It is preferable to configure the "launch instruction effect" to be executed in order to promote the above.

72 to 75 show an example of the “launch instruction effect” executed by the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, and the “launch instruction effect” will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. I do.

As a premise for executing the "launch instruction effect", the large prize device P750 includes the flow path discharge sub-sensor P7514 (see FIG. 54) that detects that the large prize device P750 has passed through the winning area where the prize can be won. ), And it is assumed that the flow path intrusion sub-sensor P7518 (not shown) that detects that the game ball has invaded the winning area of the large winning area is arranged.

Then, the staging control board P41 is configured to increment (+1) the number information of the game balls staying in the winning area of the large winning device based on the detection of the flow path intrusion sub-sensor P7518. Based on the detection signal of the discharge sub-sensor P7514 and the detection information of the prize sensor P7542 (or the specific area P7546 and the discharge sensor P7547) of the prize-winning device P750 transmitted from the main control board P40 as an effect control command, the prize-winning device By decrementing (-1) the number information of the game balls staying in the winning area of the large winning device P750, it is possible to manage how many game balls are staying in the winning area of the large winning device P750. It is something that is.

FIG. 72 shows an example of an effect displayed on the effect display device P80 during the big hit game (between rounds) as the “launch instruction effect”.

In the example of FIG. 72, the round display P820 and the acquired ball number display P822 are displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the right-handed notification P832 is displayed at the lower right of the screen. In the example of FIG. 72, when the closing condition of the large winning device P750 in the second round game (unit game) is satisfied, it is displayed between rounds (for example, 8 seconds) in the period of 2 to 3 rounds. An example of the screen is shown.

At the upper part of the screen, the "launch amount instruction notification P837" in the "launch instruction effect" is displayed (dotted line area in FIG. 72). "Fire amount instruction notification P837" is an indicator image as "Fire amount monitor P838" and "Right-handed to store energy !!" and "(Upward arrow image) here as" Fire amount instruction message P839 ". The text "Please save up to _ X seconds remaining" is displayed.

The "launch amount monitor P838" detects detection information of sensors such as the above-mentioned flow path intrusion sub-sensor P7518 and flow path discharge sub-sensor P7514, and detection of the winning sensor P7542 (or specific area P7546 and discharge sensor P7547) from the main control board P41. Based on the effect control command related to the information, it is displayed how many game balls are staying in the winning area on the big winning opening slide plate P7533 of the big winning device P750 at the current timing. The "launch amount monitor P838" is displayed so that when the game ball is ejected from the winning area of the large winning device P750, the number of hatching areas indicating the number of stays decreases, so that the change can be reversibly displayed. ..

In the "launch amount instruction message P839", the characters "Right-handed to store energy !!" prompt the player to launch the game ball in the right area P501R of the game area P501, and "(upward arrow image) up to this point. Instruct that the game ball should be fired so as to create a situation where 7 balls are staying on the big winning opening slide plate P7533 on the "Fire amount monitor P838" with the message "Please collect". There is. The display of "remaining X seconds" in the "firing amount instruction message P839" indicates the timing at which the next round game (unit game) is started, and in the case of FIG. 72, the remaining time until the third round is started. There is.

In the production of FIG. 72, an image of an ally character who is storing energy to launch an attack on an enemy character is displayed in the center area of the screen, and a hatching area (large prize) of the indicator image of the "firing amount monitor P838" is displayed. The display of the ally side character and the energy (the white spherical object issued above the ally side character) changes in conjunction with the number of game balls on the mouth slide plate P7533. Note that these character images and energy images may be configured to change in conjunction with the remaining time of the "firing amount instruction message P839" without being linked to the "firing amount monitor P838".

FIG. 73 is a state of the closing time (between rounds) between the second round round game (unit game) and the third round round game (unit game), which is the same as in FIG. 72, and is a state of the three round round game (unit). It shows the state one second before the start of the game).

In the production example of FIG. 73, the hatching area of the “launch amount monitor P838” is nine, the player continues to launch the game ball during the closing time (between rounds), and the nine game balls are large. It is informed that the situation exists on the winning opening slide plate P7533 (the winning area of the large winning device P750).

At this time, as the "launch amount instruction message P839", since the game balls discharged from the prizeable area of the large prize device P750 may be generated, the number of game balls in the prizeable area of the large prize device P750 is maintained. Or, in order to increase it, the display of the characters "Right-handed to store energy !!" is continuously displayed. In addition, it was confirmed that the 7th game ball instructed to stay in the character string "(Upward arrow image) Please collect up to this point", which is another image of the "Fire amount instruction message P839". It changes to the character string "OK !! Keep it !!" at the timing, and asks the player not to reduce the number of game balls in the winning area of the large winning device P750.

FIG. 74 shows an effect image immediately after the start of the third round of the jackpot game in which the “launch instruction effect” is executed.

FIG. 74 shows how the ally character is attacking the enemy character by releasing the accumulated energy for the attack.

The example of FIG. 74 shows a situation in which the third round game (unit game) is started in the same situation as in FIG. 73, and nine game balls are falling from the winning area of the large winning device P750. .. Therefore, the round display P820 and the acquired ball number display P822 are a display of "ROUND3" and a display of "00435pt" (300 balls + 15 prize balls x 9 prizes).

In FIG. 74, a count display P825 (display of “9/10”) indicating the number of winnings in a round game (unit game) is performed at the lower right of the screen, and 10 prizes, which is the end condition of the round game (unit game), are awarded. , Indicates that 9 prizes are currently being won. In the large winning device P750 adopted for the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, a large number of game balls win at the first opening of each round, but 10 winnings are always performed at the first opening. Since this is not the case, it is configured to show the player the actual situation and indicate that the state in which the game ball should be fired is continuing.

The display of "GET126 (changing to 127)" is executed in the substantially center of the screen of FIG. 74, and the notification of the number of acquired game balls acquired in this round game is notified while counting up. .. The count-up display of the number of acquired game balls is configured to change toward 150 balls, which is the number of acquired game balls in one round, but 10 balls are not necessarily sent to the big prize device P750 at the first opening of each round game. Since it is not always the case that a prize is won, the display of the number of acquired game balls changes smoothly to 150 balls by the remaining prizes being generated while the display for notifying the number of acquired game balls is changing due to the count-up. The person is notified as if he / she could acquire 150 balls at a time.

The effect display immediately after the start of the round game (unit game) shown in FIG. 74 is not the closing time (between rounds), but when the 10th ball is won in the large prize device P750, the effect is being executed. Even if there is, the control state of the gaming machine (control state of the special game controlled by the main control board P40) shifts to the closing time (between rounds), so that the position where the appearance of the effect is not easily deteriorated (FIG. 74). In the upper left), "Fire amount instruction notification P837" is displayed small.

The effect during the round game (unit game) shown in FIG. 74 is "0.5 seconds x 1 + 0.2 seconds x 2" (+ closing time 0.5 x), which is the opening mode (opening pattern) of the grand prize device P750. According to 2), it is composed of about 2 seconds to 4 seconds, and even if the closing time (between rounds) shifts during this period, the effect display is continued. Then, when the display of the attack effect of the character shown in FIG. 74 is completed, the display is switched to the effect display for the closing time (between rounds) as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73.

In this way, since the effect display during the round game (unit game) is configured to be maintained even after the closing time (between rounds), the player can play the game ball for the next round game (unit game). The "launch amount instruction notification P837" is configured to continue as a staging display during a round game (unit game) so as not to forget to fire. The "launch instruction amount notification P837" in the round game (unit game) is displayed with the "fire amount monitor 838" (small) and the "launch amount instruction message P839" that says "I'm still going! The remaining number of seconds of the "firing amount instruction message P839" is "? Seconds" in FIG. 74, but when the closing time (between rounds) starts, the closing time (between rounds) corresponds to ". It is configured to switch to "8 seconds".

FIG. 75 shows another example of the “launch instruction effect”. In the effect display example of FIG. 75, in the first round game (unit game) of the special game (big hit, small hit), the effect display is for urging the game ball to stay in the winning area of the large winning device P750. Then, it is executed at an appropriate timing according to the start timing of the first round game (unit game) of the special game (big hit, small hit) such as the variable display of the special symbol, the fixed time of the special symbol symbol, and the big hit start demo time. It is an effect display to be performed.

In the example of FIG. 75, the decorative symbol P801 is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating that a special game (big hit or small hit) occurs (in FIG. 75, it is a doublet of "111", but other special symbols are used. In the case of doublets or small hits, the pattern is the same color and may be a combination of "337 (red)"), and a big prize is given to the game ball when the first round game (unit game) of the special game starts. An example of executing the "launch instruction effect" to stay in the winning area of the device P750 is shown.

Although not shown, in the final round of the jackpot game, when the 10th ball, which is the end condition of the round game (unit game), is won, the closing time (between rounds) for the next round game is reached. Instead, it will shift to a short closing time (between rounds) and a big hit end demo time. In the large winning device P750 adopted for the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, a winning of the 10th ball, which is a condition for ending the round game (unit game), may occur immediately after the start of the round game (unit game). Therefore, when the effect during the round game (unit game) as shown in FIG. 74 is displayed in the final round, the transition destination effect mode suggestion effect that suggests the game state after the big hit game that should be displayed in the big hit end demo, and the transition destination effect mode suggestion effect. A big hit game result notification effect (big hit result effect) for notifying the number of acquired game balls acquired during the big hit, and a prepaid card inserted into a game device (CR unit, etc.) for the player to rent out the game balls. It is necessary to devise an effect control in relation to the display such as an effect that encourages the extraction of.

That is, if the effect during the final round game (unit game) (effect similar to FIG. 74) is displayed until it is completed, the display period of the effect to be displayed during the jackpot end demo period may be shortened, or the first half may be displayed. It is possible that the notification may not be visible and the notification may be insufficient. On the other hand, if the big hit end demo production is prioritized, the production during the final round game (unit game) will end in the middle, and the big hit production will be performed. There may be a problem that the appearance and the taste of the product are deteriorated.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is configured to display the effect during the round game (unit game) including a part of the big hit end demo effect as the effect display of the final round of the big hit game.

More specifically, the effect during the round game (unit game) in the final round of the jackpot game in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is similar to the effect shown in FIG. 74, and the ally character makes a final attack. In addition to displaying the effect to be performed, the jackpot game result notification effect is to be executed, and the total number of acquired game balls acquired as a result of the jackpot game is counted up and displayed by superimposing it on the action animation of the ally side character. (For example, in the case of 10 rounds, a display for counting up from 1350 to 1500 is displayed).

In this way, when the big winning device P750, which can generate a large number of winning balls at one time, is adopted like the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the round game during the final round of the big hit game ( By displaying a part of the effect that may be displayed as a big hit end demo effect as a part of the effect during the round game (unit game), the final round effect of the big hit game and the big hit It is configured so that the appearance of the production during the end demonstration can be prevented from being deteriorated and the game can be enhanced. The jackpot end demo effect executed in the effect during the final round of the big hit game may not be a big hit game result notification effect, but may be a transition destination effect mode suggestion effect, an effect that encourages the removal of the prepaid card, or the like.

<< Adoption of continuous operation device operation gate for accessories >>
Subsequently, as another example of "the effects and other game machine specifications that can be adopted for the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment", the adoption of the "accessory continuous actuating device operating gate" will be described.

The "feature continuous actuating device operating gate" is a structure (sensor) arranged in the game area P501 that detects a game ball that triggers "operation of the bonus continuous actuating device", that is, "start of a big hit game". ).

The "feature continuous actuating device operating gate" may be arranged as a dedicated structure, or other winning devices such as the general winning device P730 (right side general winning opening P731R, etc.) may be arranged. It may be configured so that the mouth also serves as a "accessory continuous actuating device actuating gate".

Then, the "feature continuous actuating device operating gate" is arranged downstream of the winning area of the large winning device P750 (also used as, for example, the flow path discharge subsensor P7514), and is short after passing through the "feature continuous actuating device operating gate". After going through the time jackpot start demo (0.1 second, 1 interrupt, etc.), the round game (unit game) of the first round of the jackpot is configured to start.

With this configuration, a large number of game balls such as the large winning device P750 used in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment are retained, and the displacement operation of the large winning device P750 to the easy-to-enter state is started. At the same time, in a mechanism that generates prizes at once, the start timing of the big hit (first round) is the timing to detect one game ball that has passed through the winning area of the big prize device P750, so that a large number of game balls are generated. It is possible to easily execute the start of the big hit (first round) in the situation where the big winning device P750 stays in the winning area.

In addition to the above cases, in the example of using the "feature continuous actuating device operating gate", the "feature continuous actuating device operating gate" is arranged on the upstream side of the winning area of the large winning device P750 (the bonus continuous actuating device operating gate). For example, 6 seconds after passing through the "feature continuous actuating device operating gate" (also used as the flow path intrusion sub-sensor P7518), the game ball passing through the "feature continuous actuating device operating gate" covers the winning area of the large winning device P750. The start of the jackpot (first round) may be executed at a timing before the time when the passage is completed.

In the variable display of the special symbol that is a big hit, the effect display device P80 tends to perform a long-time effect such as a reach effect, so that the player tends to stop the launch of the game ball. Even when the "instruction effect" is executed, the game ball may not be sufficiently retained in the winning area of the large prize device P750 at the start timing of the big hit game, such as when the effect display device P80 is not paid attention to. be. Therefore, by using the "feature continuous operation device operating gate", the start timing of the jackpot (first round) according to the launch status of the player's game ball can be set, which is sufficient from the start of the jackpot game. The game ball can be configured so as to easily stay in the winning area of the big winning device P750, and a reliable winning in a big hit game using the big winning device P750 adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment can be obtained. It can be configured to be secured.

<< Opening mode (opening pattern) of small hit games in the game machine specifications of small hit V >>
Next, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the small hit game executed in the game machine specification adopting the “small hit V” shown in the game machine specifications 3 to the game machine specifications 5 will be described.

In the above description of the gaming machine specifications, even during the small hit game in which the small hit is V, the opening mode (opening) is the same as the opening operation (displacement operation) in the opening mode (opening pattern) of the big winning device P750 during the big hit. Although it was explained that the pattern) is executed, in the game machine specification that adopts the "small hit V", the passage of the game ball to the specific area (specific area sensor P7546) during the small hit game is a big hit game. Since it is an important condition for the start of the small hit game, in order to ensure that a prize is won in a specific area during the small hit game, the opening mode (opening pattern) for the small hit game is configured to be set separately. May be good.

As an opening mode (opening pattern) during a small hit game in a gaming machine specification that employs a small hit V, the large winning opening slide plate P7533 of the large winning device P750 is opened for 0.1 seconds + closed for 0.5 seconds. It may be repeated once (the 10th operation has no closing time of 0.5 seconds). With this configuration, the number of displacements of the large winning opening slide plate P and the time maintained in the small hit game are longer than the "0.5 seconds x 1 + 0.2 seconds x 2" shown in the previous example. Therefore, it becomes possible to more reliably execute a prize in a specific area of the large prize device P750.

P pachinko game machine P1 outer frame, P2 front frame, P3 glass frame,
P4 back set unit, P5 game board, P40 main control board,
P41 staging control board, P42 image control board, P43 payout control board,
P44 power supply board, P47 power switch, P48 ram clear switch,
P49 setting key switch, P50 main control display device,
P51 1st special symbol display device, P52 2nd special symbol display device,
P80 effect display device, P81 effect operation means (P380 effect operation unit,
P381 production button, P382 lever, P383 cross key),
P82 production lamp (P350 frame lamp, P550 board lamp),
P83 speaker (P141 curtain plate speaker, P371 upper speaker),
P560 Staging accessory, P710 1st start winning device,
P720 2nd start winning device, P730 general winning device,
P740 Normal electric accessory P750 Large winning opening device P755 Special electric accessory, P770 Ordinary electric accessory P801 Decorative symbol, P802 Simple design, P803 Evacuation symbol P810 Hold display area, P811 Hold object P814 Simple hold display,

Claims (1)

A pachinko gaming machine equipped with a variable winning device having an opening / closing member of 1.
The variable winning device is
When a predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the opening / closing member of 1 is configured to be displaced so that the game ball can easily win a prize in the variable winning device.
The game ball on the opening / closing member of 1 is a region in which the game ball on the opening / closing member can roll, and the game ball on the opening / closing member of 1 is variably winning with the displacement operation to the mode in which the opening / closing member of 1 is easy to win. The first prize-winning area that falls toward the prize-winning area of the device,
After rolling the gaming ball toward the winning area, which is a region arranged in the vicinity of the opening / closing member of 1 and is generated by the displacement operation of the opening / closing member of 1 to the mode in which the winning / closing member is easy to win. A pachinko gaming machine having a second winning area for dropping a game ball into the winning area.

Images